Meade | 2080/LX6 | Instruction manual | Meade 2080/LX6 Instruction manual

Instruction Manual
7" LX200 Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope
8", 10", and 12" LX200 Schmidt-Cassegrain Telescopes
Meade Instruments Corporation
NOTE: Instructions for the use of optional accessories
are not included in this manual. For details in this regard,
see the Meade General Catalog.
(2)
(1)
(1)
(2)
Ray (2)
1/2°
Ray (1)
8.218"
8.016"
(2)
8.0"
(1)
8.0"
Secondary
Mirror
Focal
Plane
Secondary
Baffle
Primary Baffle Tube
Field Stops
Primary Mirror
Correcting
Plate
The Meade Schmidt-Cassegrain Optical System (Diagram not to scale)
In the Schmidt-Cassegrain design of the Meade 8", 10", and 12" models, light enters from the right, passes through a thin lens with
2-sided aspheric correction (“correcting plate”), proceeds to a spherical primary mirror, and then to a convex aspheric secondary
mirror. The convex secondary mirror multiplies the effective focal length of the primary mirror and results in a focus at the focal plane,
with light passing through a central perforation in the primary mirror.
The 8", 10", and 12" models include oversize 8.25", 10.375" and 12.375" primary mirrors, respectively, yielding fully illuminated fieldsof-view significantly wider than is possible with standard-size primary mirrors. Note that light ray (2) in the figure would be lost entirely,
except for the oversize primary. It is this phenomenon which results in Meade 8", 10", and 12" Schmidt-Cassegrains having off-axis
field illuminations 10% greater, aperture-for-aperture, than other Schmidt-Cassegrains utilizing standard-size primary mirrors. The
optical design of the 4" Model 2045D is almost identical but does not include an oversize primary, since the effect in this case is small.
LX200 Schmidt-Cassegrain telescopes now feature new baffle tube designs. These computer-optimized designs incorporate a series
of 7 to 11 (depending on the focal ratio and size of the LX200) internal field-stops to eliminate almost all internal reflections, yielding
the best image contrast available in any Schmidt-Cassegrain available today.
Field Stops
7"
8.25"
Focal
Plane
Primary Baffle Tube
Secondary Baffle
Primary Mirror (f/2.5)
The Meade 7” Maksutov-Cassegrain Optical System (Diagram not to scale)
The Meade 7" Maksutov-Cassegrain design optimizes imaging performance by utilizing a combination of two-sided spherical
meniscus lens (right), a strongly aspheric f/2.5 primary mirror, and a spherical secondary mirror. The convex secondary mirror
multiplies the effective focal length of the primary by a factor of six, resulting in an overall f/15 system at the Cassegrain focus.
The oversize 8.25" primary mirror results in a fully-illuminated (unvignetted) field of view significantly wider than can be obtained with
Maksutov optics incorporating primary mirrors of the same aperture as their meniscus correcting lenses. Computer-optimized primary
and secondary mirror baffles, as well as a sequence of field stops internal to the primary mirror baffle, yield lunar, planetary, stellar,
and deep-space images of uncommonly high contrast and resolution.
-3-
✵
WARNING!
✵
Never use the LX200 telescope to look at the Sun! Looking at or near the Sun will cause instant
and irreversible damage to your eye. Eye damage is often painless, so there is no warning to the
observer that damage has occurred until it is too late. Do not point the telescope or its viewfinder
at or near the Sun. Do not look through the telescope or its viewfinder as it is moving. Children
should always have adult supervision while observing.
1
18
2
14
3
13
6
4
5
12
7
8
9
10
11
15
16
17
Fig. 1: 8” LX200 Telescope.
Captions for Figure 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Viewfinder Dew Shield
Viewfinder Collimation Screws
Declination (Dec) Setting Circle
Declination Pointer
Focus Knob
Eyepiece Holder
Right Ascension (R.A) Lock
Right Ascension Slow-Motion Controls
Right Ascension Vernier Pointer
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Right Ascension Setting Circle
Power Panel
Keypad Hand Controller
Diagonal Mirror
Eyepiece
Bubble Level
Hour Angel (HA) Pointer
Drive Base
Viewfinder Focus Lock Ring
-4-
Contents
7" LX200 Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope
8”, 10”, & 12" LX200 Schmidt-Cassegrain Telescope
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1. What is the LX200? An Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
a. Heavy-Duty Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
b. Built-In 64,359 Object Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
c. Altazimuth Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
d. Terrestrial Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
e. Keypad and Power Panel Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2. Standard Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1. What You Should Have . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2. Please Look Everything Over. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3. Inspecting the Optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4. Caution: All LX200 Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
5. Caution: 10” and 12” LX200 Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
6. Keypad Version Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Telescope Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1. The Field Tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2. Mounting the Viewfinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
a. Attaching the Viewfinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
b. Focusing the Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
c. Collimating the Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3. Attaching the Diagonal Mirror and Eyepiece . . . . . . . . 8
4. Collimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5. 12” Tube Swing-Through Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
6. 7” Tube Swing-Through Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
7. Maksutov Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1. Using the LX200 Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2. Using the LX200 in LAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3. Using the LX200 in ALTAZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
a. Entering Basic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
b. Location of the Observing Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
c. Local Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
d. Setting Up the Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
e. Using the MODE key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
f. Library Object Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4. Star Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
a. 1-Star with Known SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
b. 2-Star with Known SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
c. Unknown SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
d. Which Alignment Method to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
The LX200 Keypad Hand Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1. ENTER Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2. MODE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. GO TO Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4. Direction Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5. Speed Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
6. RET Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
7. FOCUS Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
8. MAP Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
9. Object Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
10.PREV and NEXT Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
The LX200 Power Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1. ON/OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2. N/S Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3. Ammeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4. DEC Motor Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5. CCD Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
6. Power 12vDC Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
7. Keypad Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
8. Reticle Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
9. Focuser Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
10.RS-232 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
11. Aux Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Mode Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1. Mode 1: Telescope/Object Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
a. Telescope Menu File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
b. Object Library Menu File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2. Mode 2: Coordinates/GO TO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
a. Coordinates Menu File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
b. GO TO Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3. Mode 3: Clock/Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4. Mode 4: TIMER/FREQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
a. TIMER = Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
b. FREQ = Menu Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
5. Mode 5: Keypad Off/Brightness Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Magnification and Field of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1. Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2. Apparent Field and Actual Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Appendix A: Equatorial Wedge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1. 8” Equatorial Wedge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
a. Azimuth Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
b. Deluxe Latitude Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2. Superwedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3. Mounting the Telescope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4. Magnetic Compass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
a. Setting Magnetic Declination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
b. Compass Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
c. Finding True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Appendix B: Equatorial Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1. Celestial Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2. Lining Up with the Celestial Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3. Precise Polar Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Appendix C: Star Library and Star Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1. Alignment Stars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2. Star Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Appendix D: Object Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1. The LX200 64,359 Object Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
a. SAO Catalog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
b. UGC Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
c. CNGC Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
d. IC Catalog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
e. GCVS Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
f. Star Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
g. M (Messier) Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
h. Planet Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2. CNGC Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3. STAR Catalog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4. M (Messier) Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Appendix E: Maintaining Your LX200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1. Keeping Your Telescope Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2. Collimation of the Optical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3. Right Ascension Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4. Behind the Power Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5. Factory Servicing and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Appendix F: Personal Computer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1. The RS-232 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2. LX200 Test Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3. LX200 Command Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
a. Command Set Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
b. General Telescope Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
c. Telescope Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
d. Home Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
e. Library/Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
f. Miscellaneous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4. LX200 Demo Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Appendix G: LX200 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
-5-
INTRODUCTION
As a new LX200 owner, you are preparing for a journey into the
universe with the most advanced amateur telescope ever
produced. The advent of this instrument is the culmination of
twenty years of innovation and design at Meade Instruments;
never before have the features you have in your hands been
available to amateur astronomers: from robotic object location
to the revolutionary Smart Drive and the most stable mounting
structure ever. Your telescope comes to you ready for
adventure; it will be your tour guide and traveling companion in
a universe of planets, galaxies, and stars.
Meade 8", 10", and 12" LX200 Schmidt-Cassegrain and 7"
Maksutov-Cassegrain telescopes are instruments of advanced
mirror-lens design for astronomical and terrestrial applications.
Optically and mechanically, the 7", 8", 10", and 12" telescope
models are perhaps the most sophisticated and precisely
manufactured telescopes ever made available to the serious
amateur. These telescopes enable the visual astronomer to
reach out for detailed observations of the Solar System (the
planets: Jupiter, Saturn, Mars) and beyond to distant nebulae,
star clusters, and galaxies. The astrophotographer will find a
virtually limitless range of possibilities since, with the precision
Meade worm-gear motor drive system, long exposure guided
photography becomes not a distant goal, but an achievable
reality. The capabilities of the instrument are essentially limited
not by the telescope, but by the acquired skills of the observer
and photographer.
The 7", 8", 10", and 12" LX200 are, with the exception of a few
assembly operations and features, almost identical
operationally. Most standard and optional accessories are
interchangeable between the three telescopes. The
instructions in this manual generally apply to all three
telescopes; when exceptions to this rule occur, they are clearly
pointed out.
Important Note: If you are anxious to use your Meade LX200
Telescope for the first time, at the very least be sure to read
TELESCOPE ASSEMBLY (page 7), and QUICK START (page9)
sections of this manual. Thereafter, we urge you to read the
balance of this manual thoroughly at your leisure, in order that
you may fully enjoy the many features offered by the
instrument.
1. What Is the LX200? An Overview
Meade LX200 SCT’s mark a new era in telescope technology
for the amateur astronomer, whether beginner or seasoned
veteran. For the beginner LX200 electronics permit the location
and observation of the major planets as well as hundreds of
deep-sky objects the very first night you use the telescope. For
the experienced amateur the telescopes’ pushbutton electric
slewing, digital readouts, Smart Drive, and much more open up
visual and photographic capabilities heretofore undreamed of.
a.
Heavy-Duty Mounts
with 9-speed Dual-Axis Electronics
DC-servo-motor-controlled worm gear drives on both telescope
axes permit observatory-level precision in tracking, guiding,
and slewing. The 9-speed dual-axis drives cover every possible
contingency of telescope positioning: Press the SLEW button
on the keypad controller for rapid motion of the telescope
across the skies at up to 8 degrees per sec. (6 degrees per sec.
for the 12" LX200) on both axes simultaneously; once near the
target, switch instantly to the FIND speed for centering in the
viewfinder at 2 degrees per sec. Observing the object in the
main telescope, use the CNTR speed (32x sidereal) to place
the object in the center of the field. During long-exposure
astrophotography press the GUIDE button for precise
corrections at 2x sidereal speed.
b.
Built-in 64,359-Object Library
Enter into the keypad any of the 110 Messier objects, 7,840 of
the finest NGC objects (galaxies, diffuse or planetary nebulae,
star clusters), one of the 8 major planets from Mercury to Pluto,
one of 351 alignment stars or any one of 56,050 SAO, UGC, IC
or GCVS objects, press GO TO, and the telescope
automatically slews, or moves, to the object at up to 8° per sec.,
centering it in the main telescope field.
c.
Altazimuth Mode Operation
For all visual observing applications, and for lunar and
planetary photography, Meade LX200’s may be set up in the
Altazimuth mode. Just attach the telescope’s drive base
directly to the tripod, use the fast 1-star alignment procedure,
and the telescope’s computer actuates 2-axis tracking that
keeps objects precisely centered in the field, even at high
powers, during the entire observing session.
d.
Terrestrial Operation
Meade LX200’s make incredible land-view telescopes. Set the
telescope up in the Altazimuth format, activate the Land menu
option on the telescope’s computer, and use the keypad to
track land objects on both axes at any of the same 4 drive
speeds!
e.
Keypad and Power Panel Functions
The multifunction capability of LX200’s includes direct
connection of popular CCD autoguider/imagers; RS- 232 serial
interface with a personal computer (PC), allowing the user to
perform all of the keypad functions through, or write custom
telescope software for a PC; brightness level control of an
illuminated reticle eyepiece from the keypad and including
special pulse-mode reticle operation.
2. Standard Equipment
a.
7" Model LX200
lncludes 7" Maksutov-Cassegrain optical tube assembly with
EMC
super
multi-coatings
(D
=
178mm,
F = 2670mm-f/15); heavy-duty fork mount, with 4"-dia. sealed
polar ball bearing, quartz-microprocessor-controlled 5.75"
worm gears on both axes; setting circles in RA and Dec;
handheld keypad Electronic Command Center with digital
readout display, permanently-programmable Smart Drive, 9speed drive control on both axes, GO TO controller, HighPrecision Pointing, and 64,340-object onboard celestial
software library; internal tube-cooling fan for rapid image
stabilization; 25 ft. power cord and adapter for telescope
operation from 115v.AC; 8 x 50mm viewfinder; eyepiece-holder
and diagonal prism (1.25"); Series 4000 SP26mm eyepiece;
variable-height field tripod; operating instructions.
b.
8" Model LX200
lncludes 8" Schmidt-Cassegrain optical tube assembly with
EMC super multi-coatings (D = 203mm, F = 1280mm-f/6.3 or
2000mm-f/10); heavy-duty fork mount, with 4"-dia. sealed polar
ball bearing, quartz-microprocessor-controlled 5.75" worm
gears on both axes, and multi-function power panel display on
the drive base; manual and electric slow-motion controls on
both axes; setting circles in RA and Dec; handheld keypad
Electronic Command Center with digital readout display, PPEC
Smart Drive, 9-speed drive control on both axes, GO TO
controller, High-Precision Pointing, and 64,340-object onboard
celestial software library; 25 ft. power cord and adapter for
telescope operation from 115v.AC; 8 x 50mm viewfinder;
eyepiece-holder and diagonal prism (1.25"); Series 4000
SP26mm eyepiece; variable-height field tripod; operating
instructions.
c.
10" Model LX200
lncludes 10" Schmidt-Cassegrain optical tube assembly with
EMC super multi-coatings (D = 254mm, F = 1600mm-f/6.3 or
2500mm-f/10); heavy-duty fork mount, with 4"-dia. sealed polar
ball bearing, quartz-microprocessor-controlled 5.75" worm
gears on both axes, and multi-function power panel display on
the drive base; manual and electric slow-motion controls on
both axes; setting circles in RA and Dec; handheld keypad
Electronic Command Center with digital readout display, PPEC
Smart Drive, 9-speed drive control on both axes, GO TO
controller, High-Precision Pointing, and 64,340-object onboard
-6celestial software library; 25 ft. power cord and adapter for
telescope operation from 115v.AC; 8 x 50mm viewfinder;
eyepiece-holder and diagonal prism (1.25"); Series 4000
SP26mm eyepiece; variable-height field tripod; operating
instructions.
d.
12" Model LX200
lncludes 12" Schmidt-Cassegrain optical tube assembly with
EMC super multi-coatings (D = 305mm, F = 3048mm-f/10);
heavy-duty fork mount, with 4"-dia. sealed polar ball bearing,
quartz-microprocessor-controlled 5.75" worm gears on both
axes, and multi-function power panel display on the drive base;
manual and electric slow-motion controls on both axes; setting
circles in RA and Dec; handheld keypad Electronic Command
Center with digital readout display, PPEC Smart Drive, 7-speed
drive control on both axes, GO TO controller, High-Precision
Pointing, and 64,340-object onboard celestial software library;
25 ft. power cord and adapter for telescope operation from
115v.AC; 8 x 50mm viewfinder; 2" diagonal mirror with 1.25"
adapter; Series 4000 SP26mm eyepiece; giant field tripod;
foam-fitted carrying case; operating instructions.
As the high intensity light passes through the Schmidt corrector
plate, most of it is transmitted through (about 98%+) while the
rest of the light scatters through the glass. As the light hits the
mirrored surfaces, most of it is reflected back (about 94%) while
the rest of it scatters across the coatings. The total amount of
scattered light will be significant, and its effects allow you to see
microscopic details that are normally invisible to the unaided
eye. These anomalous details are real, but their combined
effects will in no way impose limits on the optical performance,
even under the most demanding observing or imaging criteria.
4. Caution: All LX200 Owners
CAUTION: Serious damage to the drive gears may
result from shock in handling, while transporting or
commercially shipping the LX200, should the R.A.
lock (7, Fig. 1), and/or the Dec. lock (2, Fig. 4) be left
engaged. Always release the locks when storing in the
case, or when crating for commercial shipment to
allow the telescope to give, if the case or crate is
sharply jarred or dropped.
Also, the optical and mechanical axes of all LX200
telescopes have been carefully aligned at the factory
to ensure accurate object pointing. Do not loosen or
remove the fork arms or optical tube assembly from
the drive base; the resulting misalignment of the axes
will result in inaccurate slewing of the telescope in the
GO TO mode.
UNPACKING AND INSPECTION
As you begin to unpack your telescope from its cartons, you will
probably be interested in setting it up right away; we certainly
understand your excitement but please take a few minutes to
read this page before doing so. You should verify that you have
all the proper equipment, and that it has arrived to you
undamaged.
We strongly recommend that you keep your original packing
materials. If it should ever become necessary for you to return
your telescope to the Meade factory for servicing, these will
help ensure that no shipping damage will occur.
Meade LX200 telescopes supplied to countries outside the
U.S.A. are identical to those offered domestically, with the
exception of the AC wall adapter.
1. What You Should Have
Carefully unpack and remove all the telescope parts from their
packing material. Compare each part to the Standard
Equipment. You may wish to place a check next to each item
as you identify it. These Packing Programs represent the
original specifications for this instrument. Each telescope has
been inspected twice at the factory to confirm the inclusion of
every item.
5. Caution: 10" and 12" LX200 Owners
CAUTION: Do not attempt to turn the focuser knob of
the optical tube until you have read this note!
NOTE: Next to the base of the focuser you will see a redcolored slotted head bolt. This bolt is used only for safety in
shipment. Remove this bolt before attempting to turn the
focuser knob. In its place, insert the rubber plug provided as a
dust protector (this rubber plug is included with your hardware
package).
Your focuser is now operational.
WARNING: The 10" and 12" LX200 should never be
commercially shipped without this red-colored bolt in
place. This is essential during commercial transport
where rough handling may occur. For your personal
transport and storage, you will never have to use this
bolt again.
2. Please Look Everything Over
Meade Instruments and your shipper have taken precautions to
ensure that no shipping damage will occur, but if your shipment
has suffered severe vibration or impact damage (whether or not
the shipping cartons show damage) then it is important that you
retain all the original packing and contact the shipper to
arrange a formal inspection of the package or packages. This
procedure is required prior to any warranty servicing by Meade
Instruments.
a.
1.
Turn the focuser knob clockwise until it stops. This will
bring the primary mirror all the way back in the tube.
2.
Remove the rubber plug and insert the red-headed bolt.
Thread it in to a firm snug feel. Do not overtighten. (If you
have misplaced the red-headed bolt, you may use any
other bolt that is 1/4-20x1" long.
3.
When packaging the 10" or 12" LX200, be sure to release
the R.A. lock (7, Fig. 1), and Dec. lock (2, Fig. 4), to
prevent shock to the gears in the motor assemblies should
the package suffer severe handling.
3. Inspecting the Optics
Note on the “Flashlight” Test: If a flashlight or other highintensity light source is pointed down the main telescope tube,
you may at first be shocked at the appearance of the optics. To
the uninitiated, the view (depending on your line of sight and
the angle the light is coming from) may reveal what would
appear to be scratches, dark or bright spots, or just generally
uneven coatings, giving the appearance of poor surface quality.
These effects are only seen when a high intensity light is
transmitted through lenses or reflected off the mirrors, and can
be seen on any high quality optical system, including the giant
research telescopes in use today. It should be pointed out,
however, that optical quality cannot be judged by this grossly
misleading “test”, but through careful star testing. The
Flashlight Test causes even the very best optics to look
“terrible”.
Commercial Reshipment
To commercially re-ship the telescope, be sure to follow this
procedure:
Please note that commercial shipment of the 10" and 12"
LX200 Telescope without the safety bolt in place and packed in
the original factory supplied shipping containers as described
above is done at the owner’s risk and your warranty may be
voided if shipping damage results.
6. Keypad Version Number
The current keypad version is 3.20 (see sticker on back of
keypad). This does not indicate the telescope software
version—which is displayed on the keypad LED at power-up.
-7-
TELESCOPE ASSEMBLY
Use the following steps to assemble your telescope.
NOTE: If the section is not applicable to all LX200 models, it is
noted at the beginning of each section.
1. The Field Tripod
The field tripods (Figs. 2 and 3) for Meade 8", 10", and 12"
LX200 telescopes are supplied as completely assembled units,
except for the spreader bar (4, Fig. 2) and the 6 lock knobs (2
knobs for each of the 3 tripod legs) used to adjust the height of
the tripod. These knobs are packed separately for safety in
shipment.
For visual (i.e., non-photographic) observations, the drive base
(17, Fig. 1) of the telescope’s fork mount is attached directly to
the field tripod. The telescope in this way is mounted in an
“Altazimuth” (“Altitude-Azimuth,” or “vertical-horizontal”) format.
The telescope in this configuration moves along vertical and
horizontal axes, corresponding respectively to the Declination
and Right Ascension axes (explained later in this manual) in an
astronomical observing mode.
1
2
Alternately, the field tripod can be used in conjunction with the
appropriate optional equatorial wedge (APPENDIX A, page 25)
for long exposure astrophotography. The equatorial wedge
permits alignment of the telescope’s Polar Axis with the
Celestial Pole (or North Star).
After removing the field tripod from its shipping carton, stand
the tripod vertically, with the tripod feet down and with the tripod
still fully collapsed (see Fig. 3). Grasp two of the tripod legs
and, with the full weight of the tripod on the third leg, gently pull
the legs apart to a fully open position.
Thread in the 6 lock-knobs (2 on each tripod leg) near the foot
of each tripod leg (Fig. 2). These lock-knobs are used to fix the
height of the inner, extendible tripod leg sections.
NOTE: “Firm feel” tightening is sufficient; over-tightening may
result in stripping of the knob threads or damage to the tripod
legs and results in no additional strength.
The spreader bar (4, Fig. 2) has been removed for shipment.
To replace, first remove the threaded rod (2, Fig.2) from the
tripod head (1, Fig. 2); a small piece of plastic holds the
threaded rod in place. Remove the small plastic bag that is
stapled to the threaded rod. This bag contains the “C” clip
retainer (used below) and an extra clip.
Slide the spreader bar onto the threaded rod (note the correct
orientation as shown in Fig. 2) and position the threaded rod
back through the tripod head. Place the clip retainer ( a “C” clip)
into the slot in the threaded rod. This clip holds the threaded
rod in place. See Fig. 3.
4
5
3
Position the spreader bar so that the 3 arms of the spreader bar
are lined up with the 3 tripod legs.
Place the entire telescope onto the top of the tripod head, and
thread the threaded rod into the central threaded hole in the
bottom of the drive base of the telescope. Tighten the tension
knob (3, Fig. 2); firm tightening of the tension knob is sufficient
to result in rigid positioning of the tripod legs.
7
6
To vary the tripod height, loosen the 6 lock-knobs, slide the 3
inner tripod leg sections out to the desired height, and firmly retighten (but do not overtighten) the 6 lock-knobs.
To collapse the tripod (after removing the telescope and
equatorial wedge, if applicable) for storage follow these steps:
Fig. 2: LX200 Field Tripod. (1) Tripod Head; (2) Threaded
Rod; (3) Tension Knob; (4) Spreader Bar; (5) Lock Knobs;
(6) Extension Strut; (7) Tension Hub.
•
Rotate the spreader bar 60° from its assembled position,
so that one spreader bar arm is located between each
adjacent pair of tripod legs.
•
At the base of the tripod is a 3-vane extension strut
system, with a circular hub at its center (7, Fig. 2). Grasp
the tripod head (1, Fig. 2) with one hand and, with the
other hand, pull directly “up” on the central hub of the
extension strut system. This operation will cause the
tripod legs to move inward to a collapsed position.
“C” Clip
PRECAUTIONARY NOTES
Fig. 3: Field Tripod (collapsed).
•
If the tripod does not seem to extend or
collapse easily, do not force the tripod legs in
or out. By following the instructions above,
the tripod will function properly, but if you are
unclear on the proper procedure, forcing the
tripod into an incorrect position may damage
the extension strut system.
•
Do not overtighten the 6 lock-knobs used to
fix the inner tripod leg sections at various
heights. “Firm feel” tightening is sufficient.
•
Be sure the spreader bar (4, Fig. 2) is not
upside-down on the threaded rod.
-8-
2. Mounting the Viewfinder
4. Checking the Collimation of the Optics
Each 7", 8", 10", and 12" LX200 telescope is supplied as
standard equipment with an 8x50mm straight-through
viewfinder. The bracket for this viewfinder is packed separately
from the finder itself, and 6 black nylon thumbscrews for
collimation are pre-threaded into the viewfinder bracket. The
viewfinder bracket mounts onto the telescope with a quickrelease mount. See Fig. 1.
The optical systems of all Meade Schmidt-Cassegrains are
precisely collimated, or aligned, before leaving the factory.
However, if the telescope has received a severe jolt in
shipment the optics can become de-collimated, a situation
which may result in serious image degradation. Recollimating
the optics is, however, a simple procedure which is easily
performed by the telescope user. We urge all LX200 owners to
confirm the collimation of their telescope, and to recollimate the
optics if necessary. For details in this regard, see page 82.
a.
Attaching the Viewfinder
The viewfinder is shipped separately from the bracket and must
be installed into the bracket. Slide the viewfinder into the
bracket and lightly tighten the 6 collimation (alignment) screws
(2, Fig. 1).
The quick-release mount allows the viewfinder to be easily
attached or removed from the telescope. To attach the unit,
simply slide the viewfinder with bracket into the mating base on
the telescope and tighten the two thumbscrews.
b.
Focusing the Viewfinder
The viewfinder has been pre-focused at the factory. However,
should it become necessary to adjust the focus, follow these
steps:
1.
Loosen the focus lock ring (18, Fig. 1).
2.
While looking at a star, rotate the Dew Shield (1, Fig. 1)
until the star is in focus. (This refocuses the objective
lens.)
CAUTION: Take care when rotating counter clockwise.
You are unthreading the dew shield and it may fall off
if rotated too far. Refocusing the objective lens will
only require a few turns of the Dew Shield at most.
3.
When the Dew Shield is rotated to the sharpest focus for
your eye, tighten the focus lock ring against the Dew
Shield to fix its position.
c.
Collimating the Viewfinder
The viewfinder will require alignment, or collimation, with the
main telescope. Using the 26mm eyepiece, point the main
telescope at some easy to find land object (e.g., the top of a
telephone pole or corner of a building) at least 200 yards
distant. Center a well-defined object in the main telescope.
Then, simply turn the 6 nylon collimation thumbscrews
(2, Fig. 1) until the crosshairs of the viewfinder are precisely
centered on the object already centered in the main telescope.
With this collimation accomplished, objects located first in the
wide-field viewfinder will then be centered in the main
telescope’s field of view.
3. Attaching the Diagonal Mirror and Eyepiece
The eyepiece holder (6, Fig. 1) threads directly onto the rearcell thread of the 8" and 10" telescopes. The diagonal prism
(13, Fig. 1) slides into the eyepiece holder of the 7", 8" and 10"
telescopes, while the 2" diagonal mirror threads directly into the
rear-cell thread of the 12" telescope. In turn, both the diagonal
prism and diagonal mirror accept the supplied 1-1/4" O.D.
eyepiece.
For astronomical observations, the diagonal prism or mirror
generally provides a more comfortable right-angle viewing
position. Alternately, in the 8" and 10" telescopes, an eyepiece
may be inserted directly into the eyepiece holder for straightthrough observations, the 12" telescope requires the accessory
eyepiece holder. Note in this case, however, that the image will
appear inverted and reversed left-for-right. With the diagonal
prism and mirror, telescopic images appear correctly oriented
up-and-down, but still reversed left-for-right. For terrestrial
applications, where a fully corrected image orientation is
desired, both up-and-down and left-for-right, the optional #924
Erecting Prism* or #928 45° Erect-Image Diagonal Prism
should be ordered separately. Eyepieces and the diagonal
prism are held in their respective places on the telescope by a
moderate tightening of the thumbscrews on the diagonal prism
and eyepiece holder.
NOTE: There is no collimation procedure required for the
Meade 7" Maksutov-Cassegrain telescope. Factory alignment
assures optimal viewing accuracies.
5. 12" Tube Swing-Through Limit
The length of the 12" LX200 optical tube prohibits the
correcting plate end of the tube from swinging through the fork
arms — the tube will hit the mount. When the telescope is
aligned, the software will stop the telescope from moving into
the mount. If the telescope is not aligned, there are also
mechanical stops.
When in LAND or ALTAZ modes, this limit does not restrict any
sections of the sky, since the limit is set at 45° from straight
down. When in the POLAR mode, some parts of the sky might
be restricted, depending on the latitude of the observing site.
Observing sites with latitudes higher than 45° will not have any
restrictions. Latitudes below 45° will have the southern horizon
restricted somewhat. To determine the amount of sky not
available, subtract the latitude of the observing site from 45.
This will give the number of degrees of southern horizon that
the 12" LX200 will not move to. For example, if the latitude of
the observing site is 35°, then 10° (45-35) of southern sky is
unavailable for observations.
6. 7" Tube Swing-Through Limit
The length of the 7" LX200 optical tube prohibits the correcting
plate end of the tube from swinging through the fork arms —
the tube will hit the mount. When the telescope is aligned, the
software will stop the telescope from moving into the mount. If
the telescope is not aligned, there are also mechanical stops
and some parts of the sky might be restricted if using a wedge,
depending on the latitude of the observing site.
Observing sites with latitudes higher than 45° will not have any
restrictions. Latitudes below 45° will have the southern horizon
somewhat restricted when using a wedge and polar aligning. To
determine the amount of sky not available, subtract the latitude
of the observing site from 45, this will give the number of
degrees of the southern horizon that the 7" LX50 will not reach.
For example, if the latitude of the observing site is 35°, then 10°
(45 – 35) of southern sky is unavailable for observations. No
restrictions of observable sky occur in the altaz mode of
alignment and operation.
7. Maksutov Fan
The Maksutov optics are equipped with a fan which will assist
in the stabilization of the temperature of these optics. The fan
will operate when a special power cord (supplied in the
accessory box) is plugged into the fan and the LX50 panel plug
marked “Aux” with the power switch in the “ON” position. The
amount of time required to stabilize the temperature will be
dependent upon ambient conditions including the observation
site and preexisting condition of the telescope. The fan should
be activated at the beginning of the observation session to
accelerate the temperature stabilization. As soon as the optics
have reached an equilibrium with the environment the fan
should be turned off by unplugging the fan power cord. Fan
operation time should range between 5 and 25 minutes. While
it is permissible to run the fan continuously it is not
recommended because the very slight vibration of the fan may
cause noticeable movement of the objects observed in the
sensitive optics.
-9-
QUICK START
To utilize all the features of the telescope, it is necessary to
enter some information into the telescope’s computer memory,
and learn the menu structure of the keypad hand controller,
which is described in the rest of this manual. As advanced as
LX200 electronics are, the telescope is very straightforward to
operate — even if you have no experience whatsoever in using
a personal computer.
If you are reading this manual for the first time and are anxious
to “look through the telescope”, this section will describe how to
use the telescope without going through the rest of the manual.
But be sure to come back and read the details, for most of the
telescope’s features can not be accessed without a full
knowledge of these details.
1. Using the LX200 Manually
The easiest way to use the telescope is to simply operate it
manually. With the telescope mounted on the field tripod (see
The Field Tripod, page 7), and with the diagonal prism and
eyepiece in place, you are ready to make observations through
the telescope. Even without the viewfinder (if not yet installed),
terrestrial objects will be fairly easy to locate and center in the
telescope’s field of view with a low power eyepiece, simply by
“gun sighting” along the side of the main telescope tube.
By unlocking the R.A. lock (7, Fig. 1), the telescope may be
turned rapidly through wide angles in Right Ascension (R.A.).
The reason for the terminology Right Ascension and its
complementary term, Declination will be made clear later in this
manual. For now, Right Ascension simply means “horizontal”
and Declination means “vertical”. Fine adjustments in R.A. are
made by turning the R.A. slow-motion control knob (8, Fig. 1),
while the R.A. lock is in the “unlocked” position.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to move the telescope
manually in a horizontal direction when the R.A. lock
is in the “locked” position.
The R.A. slow-motion control knob may be turned, if desired,
with the R.A. lock in a “partially locked” position. In this way, a
comfortable “drag” in R.A. is created. But do not attempt to
operate the R.A. slow-motion control knob with the telescope
fully locked in R.A., as such operation may result in damage to
the internal gear system.
Releasing the Declination lock knob (2, Fig. 4), permits
sweeping the telescope rapidly through wide angles in
Declination.
To use the Declination fine-adjust, or manual slow-motion knob,
lock the telescope in Declination using the Declination lock
knob (2, Fig. 4), and turn the Declination slow-motion knob
(1, Fig. 4).
With the above mechanical operations in mind, select an easy
to find terrestrial object as your first telescope subject — for
example, a house or building perhaps one-half mile distant.
Unlock the Declination lock knob (2, Fig. 4), and R.A. lock
(7, Fig. 1), center the object in the telescopic field of view and
then re-lock the Dec. and R.A. locks. Precise image centering
is accomplished by using the Dec. and R.A. slow-motion
controls.
The focus knob (5, Fig. 1) is located at the “4 o’clock” position
as you face the rear cell of the telescope. Focusing is
accomplished internally by a precise motion of the telescope
primary mirror so that, as you turn the focus knob, there are no
externally moving parts. You will find that if you turn the focus
knob counter-clockwise you are focusing towards the infinity
setting, and turning clockwise is for close distance. There are
about 45 complete turns to go from one end of focus to the
other, and it is possible to focus past infinity. Be patient during
focusing as images quickly go in and out of focus with only a
slight amount of turning of the focus knob.
2. Using the LX200 In LAND
The 7", 8", 10", and 12" LX200 telescopes are shipped with the
microprocessor set to LAND, the align menu option you will
wish to use to view terrestrial objects. In this menu option 4
different motion speeds are active, allowing the telescope to be
moved electronically by means of the keypad. To use the
telescope in Land, follow these steps.
a.
Loosen the Dec. lock knob (2, Fig. 4) and position the
optical tube approximately level, so that the Dec. setting
circle (3, Fig. 1) reads 0°. Retighten the Dec. lock knob.
b.
Loosen the R.A. lock (7, Fig. 1) and rotate the telescope
so that the R.A. pointer (9, Fig. 1) and the HA pointer
(16, Fig. 1) are approximately in line with each other. This
will position the fork arms so that they are parallel to the
power panel (11, Fig. 1). Tighten the R.A. lock
The above two steps are not necessary for the telescope to
work, so don’t worry about having to get it exactly right. The
telescope has some “illegal” positions, places where the
telescope will not go and these two steps insure proper
operation.
c.
After setting up the telescope, plug in both coil cords with
the keypad, one of the supplied power sources, either the
AC Wall Adapter Power Converter (for AC current wall
outlets), or the optional DC Cigarette Lighter Power Cord
(used in an automobiles cigarette lighter outlet, with the
ignition turned on only to allow the electric power on from
the car battery).
d.
Turn on the power switch on the power panel of the
LX200. The keypad display (1, Fig. 5) will show “MEADE”
for several seconds as the microprocessor does a selfdiagnostic test. When the self-diagnostic test is complete,
the display will show “TELESCOPE” on the top line,
“OBJECT LIBRARY” on the lower line, and the red LED
light next to the “SLEW” button will light up.
e.
At this point, the LX200 is ready to use. Select the speed
at which you want to move the telescope by pressing the
appropriate Speed Selection Key (4, Fig 5). Note that you
will be able to “see” the telescope move only in the SLEW
and FIND modes; CNTR (center) and GUIDE motions can
only be seen while looking through the telescope. The red
LED next to that key (3, Fig. 5) will light, indicating the
speed selected. Then press one of the four direction keys
(2, Fig. 5) to move the telescope in that direction at the
selected speed.
2
1
3
Fig. 4: LX200 Declination (Vertical) System. (1) Manual
Slow-Motion Control Knob; (2) Declination Lock Knob;
(3) Declination Worm Gear Cover.
- 10 Method to Use?, page 13). Follow steps 4 through 8 in Setting
Up the Telescope, page 11, to change the telescope’s operation
to Altazimuth (ALTAZ) mode before proceeding.
1
You should find the position of your observing site to within 1 or
2 minutes of arc in both latitude and longitude. Many
automobile, pilot, and topographical maps, as well as most
atlases show latitude and longitude in 15 minute increments or
better. The accuracy of the LX200 will depend on how close
you get, so take a little time to get as accurate as you can.
2
Once the above information is determined, it can be entered
into the telescope. It is easiest to enter the data with the
telescope sitting on a table indoors—do not try to do it outside
at night.
4
3
Each step below is given without any details or explanations to
keep the process as simple and fast as possible. Next to each
step will also be a sample of what the keypad hand controller
display (1, Fig. 6) should look like after each step.
As an example, we will enter the data for Irvine, CA (LAT =
33°35', LONG = 117°42'). If at any time you get “lost,” simply
turn off the telescope and restart this procedure.
1.
Fig. 5: Keypad Hand Controller. (1) Display); (2) Direction
Keys; (3) Speed Indicator LEDs; (4) Speed Selection Keys.
Display 1
Motion Speeds
SLEW
FIND
CNTR
GUIDE
(7)
(4)
(1)
(0)
=
=
=
=
8°/sec (8”, 10”); 6°/sec (12”)
2°/sec
480 arcsec/sec
30 arcsec/sec
The LX200 can also be moved manually with the R.A. and Dec.
locks released, or as described above only. The Declination
manual slow-motion knob (1, Fig.4) is non-functional when
power is supplied to the telescope. When the power is “on”,
only use the N, S, E, and W keys on the keypad hand controller.
Serious damage can occur to the internal gears of the motor
assembly if the Declination manual slow-motion knob is turned
even a slight amount by hand.
3. Using the LX200 In ALTAZ (Altazimuth )
The two quick start methods described above allow you to use
the telescope, but do not make use of any of the computer
features available, including finding objects from the Object
Library and automatic tracking of stars. In order for these
features to work, the telescope’s power needs to be “on,” and
the computer needs some basic information, which is entered
through the keypad. Once entered, the information is
permanently remembered by the telescope’s computer and
need never be entered again, even if the telescope is turned
“on” and “off” many times.
This section will explain what keys to push to get the minimum
data required into the computer, without any detailed
explanation (see MODE FUNCTIONS, page 16, for detailed
instructions). The steps detailed here only take a few minutes
and allow you to begin making use of all the LX200 features.
2.
3.
In order for the LX200 to make the conversions between the
stellar coordinate system (R.A. and Declination) and the
Altazimuth coordinate system (altitude and azimuth), it needs
to know three pieces of information. This information only
needs to be entered one time — the LX200 remembers data
even when the power is off. Note, however, that the time should
be checked and reset, if necessary, on each observing session.
NOTE: The SITE information cannot be entered if the telescope
is in LAND mode.
If the telescope is in LAND mode, the SITE menu option (Display
2) will appear in lower case letters (see Which Alignment
→1) A A A
2) A A A
✔
→LAT
= +00° 00’
LONG = 000° 00’
Use the number keys to enter your latitude. The underline
designates the current cursor position. Mistakes can be
corrected by moving back (using the “E” and “W” keys). A
negative latitude can be entered by positioning the cursor
under the “+” and hitting the “NEXT” key (lower right-hand
key). When the latitude is correct, press ENTER. The
display will look like Display 6.
Display 6
7.
✔
Press the ENTER key. The display should now look like
Display 5.
Display 5
6.
→1) A A A
2) A A A
Press and Hold the ENTER key until the keypad hand
controller beeps. This selects the first site for editing. The
display should look like Display 4, with the first “A”
flashing.
Display 4
5.
→1) SITE
2) ALIGN
Press the ENTER key. This selects the SITE functions.
The display should look like Display 3.
Display 3
4.
→TELESCOPE
OBJECT LIBRARY
Press the ENTER key. This selects the TELESCOPE
functions. The display should now look like Display 2.
Display 2
a. Entering Basic Information
b. Location of the Observing Site
Turn the telescope power on. After a few seconds (after
the self-diagnostic test is complete), the display will look
like Display 1.
→LAT
= +33° 35’
LONG = 000° 00’
Use the number keys to enter your Longitude as above.
When complete, the display will look like Display 7.
Display 7
→LAT
= +33° 35’
LONG = 117° 42’
- 11 8.
Press ENTER to complete the site information input. The
display will go back to Display 3.
9.
Press MODE to go back to Display 2.
U.S.A. TIME ZONES
10. Press MODE again to go back to Display 1.
It is important to note that the longitude standard used in the
LX200 starts at 0 degrees in Greenwich U.K. and increases
Westerly only to 359 degrees 59 minutes. Many maps will show
Easterly longitudes which cannot be entered into the keypad
display. As an example, if your map indicates that you are at an
Easterly longitude of 18 degrees 27 minutes, then you would
enter 341 degrees 33 minutes.
Do not concern yourself with differences in longitude and
latitude as they pertain to different map spheroid projections,
those minor differences are too small to adversely affect the
longitude and latitude data input.
The display should look like Display 1. If it does not, press
the MODE key until it does.
2.
Press the MODE key twice. The display will look like
Display 8, but with a random LOCAL and SIDE times.
Display 8
3.
→LOCAL = 11:24:30
SIDE = 21:38:02
DAYLIGHT
TIME
HAWAII
+10 Hours
+9 Hours
PACIFIC
+8 Hours
+7 Hours
MOUNTAIN
+7 Hours
+6 Hours
CENTRAL
+6 Hours
+5 Hours
EASTERN
+5 Hours
+ 4 Hours
ATLANTIC
+4 Hours
+3 Hours
6.
Use the number keys to enter the GMT time zone shift
determined from the table above. Press ENTER when
done; the display will go back to Display 8. If you are using
the LX200 East of Greenwich U.K., then you must enter a
- (minus) GMT time zone shift by moving the blinking
cursor backwards in the display with the W key and then
pressing the NEXT key. The + (plus) sign will change to (minus). Use the number keys to enter the Westerly (+)
GMT time zone shift determined from the table above or
your calculated Easterly (-) time zone shift.
7.
Press the ENTER key. This will select the DATE display
(Display 12), with a random date showing.
NOTE: The Time function on the 16” LX200 telescope is a
standard quartz clock. Like nearly any timepiece, the internal
clock of the telescope should be periodically checked and
updated to keep it as accurate as possible.
1.
STANDARD
TIME
For example: You live in the Pacific Time Zone and you are on
Daylight Time. The GMT time shift is +7 hours.
c. Local Time and Date.
The local time should be set as accurately as possible, using
the 24 hour format. The local time and date are used to
determine sidereal time (star time) and the pointing accuracy of
the telescope will depend on the accuracy of the time entered.
Choose a reliable source as a reference for accurate time such
as your local airport, or telephone company. In the U.S.A. you
can double check the accuracy of the exact minutes by dialing
WWV for the universal coordinated time at (303) 499-7111 (be
sure to enter your local time hour information, not the U.T.
hour). For the example, we will use 2:40:00 P.M. on August 5,
1998.
TIME
ZONE
Display 12
8.
Press and Hold the ENTER key until the keypad hand
controller beeps. The display will look like Display 13, with
the blinking cursor over the first number.
Display 13
9.
Press and HOLD the ENTER key until the keypad hand
controller beeps (display like Display 9).
4.
Using the number keys, enter the current local time to
within 5 seconds. (Remember, 2:40:00 P.M. is 14:40:00 in
the 24 hour format.) Corrections can be made by moving
the flashing cursor using the W and E keys. The display
should look like Display 10. (NOTE: The time should be
checked and reset about once a month.)
Display 10
5.
→LOCAL = 11:24:30
SIDE = 21:38:02
→LOCAL = 14:40:00
SIDE = 21:38:02
Press the ENTER key when the time is correct. The
display will change to Display 11.
Display 11
Hours from GMT:
+08
The next step is to enter the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) time
zone shift (This procedure is a lot easier than it sounds). Simply
look up your time zone in the table below to find the GMT time
zone shift.
DATE = 0 7 / 11 / 9 1
Use the number keys to enter the current date. The
display should look like Display 14. Use the W and E keys
to move the blinking cursor left and right to correct any
mistakes.
Display 14
Display 9
DATE = 0 7 / 11 / 9 1
DATE = 0 8 / 0 5 / 9 8
10. Press the ENTER key when the date is correct.
After you press the ENTER key, the keypad hand controller will
display “Updating planetary data.” The position of the planets
depends on the date, so anytime the date is changed, the
planet positions are recalculated.
This is all the information the LX200 needs to make use of all
features. The next steps actually align the telescope with the
night sky.
d. Setting Up the Telescope
After the basic information has been entered into the telescope,
the telescope is ready to actually set-up and use. Follow
TELESCOPE ASSEMBLY (page 6) to set-up the telescope
outside, and follow these steps:
1.
Using the Bubble Level (14, Fig. 1) located on the
telescope’s drive base, level the telescope. This is a very
important step because the telescope’s pointing ability
depends on the telescope being level. Make sure the
bubble is precisely centered by adjusting the height of the
three tripod legs.
2.
Loosen the Dec. lock knob (18, Fig. 1) and position the
optical tube assembly approximately level (so that the
Dec. Circle (3, Fig. 1) reads 0°. Retighten the Dec. lock
knob.
- 12 3.
Loosen the R.A. lock (7, Fig. 1) and rotate the telescope
so that the R.A. pointer (9, Fig. 1) and the HA pointer
(16, Fig. 1) are approximately in line with each other. This
will position the fork arms so that they are parallel to the
power panel (11, Fig. 1). lock the R.A. lock.
use the next month’s chart. Once you identify the
constellation, pick any of the labeled stars that is not
within a 10 degree radius of overhead, but do not choose
Polaris, for reasons made clear below. Polaris is also
known as the North Star, and is shown for reference only.
Steps 2 and 3 are not required for the telescope to work, so
don’t worry about getting it exactly right. The telescope has
some “illegal” positions (places where the telescope will not
go) and these two steps insure proper operation.
When aligning in ALTAZ, overhead stars can confuse the
LX200 because of an illegal position that prevents the
optical tube assembly from slewing past 90 degrees
altitude to protect the viewfinder from hitting the fork arm.
The LX200 will track an overhead object, but it does so
by moving higher in altitude up to the illegal position, then
the drive speeds up and move 180 degrees in azimuth so
that the optical tube assembly can now be lowered in
altitude to keep up with the overhead object. Confusion
arises because the LX200 does not know which side of
180 degrees of azimuth that it is on. Similarly, Polaris
presents position problems in ALTAZ alignment because
it is so close to the North Celestial Pole. In this region of
the sky, the lines of Right Ascension are so close
together that even the LX200’s high-resolution encoders
can yield ambiguous data.
4.
Turn the telescope on. After a few seconds (after the selfdiagnostic test is complete), the display will look like
Display 15.
Display 15
5.
Press the ENTER key. This selects the TELESCOPE
functions. The display should look like Display 16.
Display 16
6.
→1) ALTAZ
2) POLAR
→1) ALTAZ ✔
2) POLAR
Press the ENTER key to use the checked mode (ALTAZ).
The keypad hand controller display will look like Display
20.
Display 20
10.
1) SITE
→2) ALIGN
Press the ENTER key to activate the ALTAZ mode. The
keypad hand controller will beep and display a
checkmark next to the ALTAZ (see Display 19).
Display 19
9.
In our example of August 5, we would use the August
chart, face North and look up about 45 degrees. Cygnus
is probably the easiest constellation to recognize, and we
will use the star Deneb for our example.
Use the PREV and NEXT key to scroll through the list of
alignment stars until the arrow is positioned on Deneb
(Display 24).
Press the ENTER key to select the ALIGN function. The
display will look like Display 18. (If the display looks like
Display 19 — with a checkmark already next to ALTAZ,
go to step 9.)
Display 18
8.
→1) SITE
2) ALIGN
Press the NEXT key. This will move the arrow to the
lower line (see Display 17).
Display 17
7.
→TELESCOPE
OBJECT LIBRARY
1 Star or
2 Star Alignment
Display 24
The TELESCOPE and OBJECT LIBRARY features are
accessed through a series of menus, which are shown on the
keypad hand controller display. You can scroll up or down
through the list of choices by using the PREV and NEXT keys,
and select the indicated menu option with the ENTER key.
Menu choices that are shown in lower case letters are
unavailable in the current operating mode (LAND, ALTAZ, or
POLAR). If you try to select a lower case menu option, the
keypad hand controller will emit three warning beeps. Three
beeps always indicate an attempt to perform an invalid
telescope operation.
14.
15.
Display 21
11.
If you have not already leveled the telescope, do so now.
When the telescope is level, press ENTER. The display
will look like Display 22.
Display 22
12.
This message simply reminds you what you should do
next. Press ENTER to show a display like Display 23.
Display 23
13.
Press ENTER, then
pick align star
→ACHERNAR
ACRUX A
Using the monthly star charts (APPENDIX B, page 29) pick
an alignment star. Look at the chart for the current month
and face the direction indicated. The constellations
shown are easily found — even in the city. The charts are
approximately 90 degrees wide, with the top of the chart
indicating straight up. If the time is after 9:00 PM, then
Press the ENTER key to select Deneb. The keypad hand
controller displays a message (Display 25).
Display 25
Press “1” to select “Star.” The display screen will now
look like Display 21.
Level base, then
press ENTER
CASTOR A
→DENEB
Center DENEB
then press ENTER
Center the alignment star (Deneb in our example) in the
eyepiece of the telescope. You can manually move the
telescope by loosening the Dec. lock knob and R.A. lock
or electrically by using the N, S, W, and E keys. If moving
the telescope electrically, be sure to use the speed keys,
SLEW to get close, FIND to center in the viewfinder, and
CNTR to center the star in the eyepiece. When the star is
centered, press ENTER.
The telescope is now aligned and fully functional, and
automatically begins to track objects. From this point on, make
all telescope movements using of the keypad hand controller.
Manual movements by loosening the Dec. or R.A. locks will
cause the LX200 to “lose” position, requiring realignment.
e. Using the MODE Key
The LX200 has 5 basic keypad hand controller displays, and
the MODE key is used to move between them. The 5 modes
are:
1. Telescope Functions. The TELESCOPE mode is where
all telescope functions are changed or activated and the
OBJECT LIBRARY is where the features of the object
library are accessed.
- 13 2.
Telescope Position. The first display shows the RA and
DEC (telescope position in stellar coordinates) and the
second display (accessed by pressing the ENTER key)
shows the telescope position in ALTAZ coordinates.
3.
Time and Date. The first display shows local and Sidereal
time and the second display (accessed by pressing the
ENTER key) shows the date.
4.
Timer and Freq. This display is a countdown timer and
allows the user to change drive rates. These are
advanced features.
5.
All Off. This mode simply turns off all displays and
backlighting. You can also adjust the backlighting
brightness by pressing the ENTER key and using the
PREV and NEXT keys to adjust the brightness.
f.
Library Object Keys
While in any of the 5 main keypad display modes, you can
directly access the library objects by using the M, STAR, or
CNGC keys (see APPENDIX C, page 31, of this manual for more
information on the 64,359 Object Library). Simply press an
object key, and type in the number of the object desired,
followed by ENTER. For example, a good first object for the
first part of the year is M42 — the Great Orion Nebula.
Press the M key, the 4 key, the 2 key, and finally the ENTER
key. The display will show data on the object (name, rating,
object type, brightness, size). Now press GO TO. The
telescope will automatically slew to M42.
If the object entered is not above the horizon, the keypad hand
controller will display the message “Object Below Horizon.”
Other good first objects (if above the horizon) are any of the M
objects — from M1 to M 110, and the planets. To find a planet
enter: (NOTE: 903 is the Moon.)
OBJECT LIBRARY PLANET LEGEND
PLANET
3.
Follow the keypad display prompts to choose and center
the the second alignment star. Be sure to use the keypad
to slew to the second star. After pressing the ENTER key
in the last step, the keypad display should show the
TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY screen.
Important Note: Whenever using either of the 2-Star
alignment procedures (at a known SITE or at an unknown
SITE), choosing the proper two stars will determine the
pointing accuracy of the telescope. Choose two stars that are
not too close together — try to use stars that are at least 90°
apart. Do not use Polaris because RA changes very fast at the
Pole and minor centering errors translate to large RA pointing
errors. Also, avoid stars near the zenith (straight up) since
azimuth changes very fast in this area. Generally speaking,
choosing two stars as far apart as possible will yield very
accurate pointing, often within a few arc minutes.
The LX200 calculates the distance between the two stars that
you chose in the alignment steps and compares this to the
distance that you actually slewed the telescope. This is a check
to be sure you centered the correct stars during the alignment
steps. Should the LX200 discover a discrepancy, the keypad
will display an “Align Mismatch — Check Stars” message. If
you get this message after aligning the telescope, check that
you are using the correct stars and align again.
c. Unknown SITE
To use the LX200 telescope at an unknown location, use the
following procedure:
1.
Select site #5 (UNKNOWN) from the SITE menu.
NOTE: This site cannot be edited like site numbers 1 to 4 as
described in Entering Basic Information, page 10.
2.
Follow the keypad display prompts to select and center
the two alignment stars.
As described above, the LX200 will check the accuracy of the
two stars and give the “Align Mismatch — Check Stars”
message if it detects an error.
STAR #
PLANET
STAR#
MERCURY
901
SATURN
906
VENUS
902
URANUS
907
d. Which Alignment Method to Use?
MARS
904
NEPTUNE
908
JUPITER
905
PLUTO
909
Each of the three method described above has advantages and
disadvantages. The following table summarizes these
properties.
4. Star Alignment
The 2-Star initialization routines provide three options for
aligning the LX200 telescope when in the ALTAZ mode.
1-Star
Known
2-Star
Known
2-Star
Unknown
Level
of
Telescope
2-Star
Alignment
2-Star
Alignment
NOTE: The 2-Star initialization routines only apply to the ALTAZ
alignment mode (see MODE FUNCTIONS, page 16, for POLAR
and LAND mode initialization).
Pointing
Accuracy
Determined
By:
The first and second options require that entry of the SITE and
TIME information as described in Entering Basic Information
(page 10). The third option is used when the SITE information
is not known or has not been entered into the LX200’s memory.
Atmospheric
Refraction
Correction*
Yes
Yes
No
Atmospheric
Refraction
Correction
Determined
By:
Level
of
Telescope
Level
of
Telescope
Not
Applicable
a. 1-Star with Known SITE
The 1-Star alignment routine was explained in detail in Setting
Up the Telescope (page 11).
b. 2-Star at Known SITE
To use the 2-Star alignment procedure at a known site, follow
these steps:
1.
2.
Select the 2-Star alignment (by pressing the “2” key); the
keypad display will prompt you to level the base. This
leveling step requires a rough level only and, unlike the 1Star alignment routine, does not affect the pointing
accuracy of the telescope. (See Section d. below for a
summary of the differences in telescope operation when
selecting each of the three alignment procedures.)
After leveling the base and pressing ENTER, follow the
keypad display prompts to select the first alignment star.
Slew to that star using the N, S, E, and W keys.
When
Best
Used
Best used
when the
telescope is
permanently
mounted
and
accurately
leveled
Best used
Best used
on a
when the
transportable
SITE
telescope
information
with the
is not
SITE
available
information
available
* Atmospheric Refraction Correction: Light from an astronomical
object is “bent,” (refracted) as it passes through the atmosphere.
This bending is more pronounced near the horizon because there is
more atmosphere for the light to pass through, and it shifts the
apparent position of the star. The LX200 calculates this bending and
compensates for it when slewing to objects near the horizon.
- 14 -
THE LX200 KEYPAD HAND CONTROLLER
Designed to make you a better astronomer, the integration of
optics, mechanics, electronics, and software in the LX200
Maksutov Cassegrain or Schmidt Cassegrain Telescope is
easily mastered. So easy, in fact that the telescope becomes a
natural extension of the observer.
The LX200 gives you virtually every telescope function possible
with every control in a compact hand held console. The red
LCD backlit keypad has tactile touch buttons (some of which
are brighter than others), designed to have the right feel even
if you wear gloves. Its red LCD backlit display, key
arrangement, and easy to understand information allow you to
focus the telescope and your mind on the subject at hand.
The LX200 keypad hand controller is a dual axis drive corrector
with periodic error control; an information display center for the
computerized library; a digital coordinate readout system; a
pulsing, illuminated reticle eyepiece brightness controller; a two
speed electric focuser controller, and a red LED flashlight!
You will find within a few minutes of powering up the LX200 that
the keypad becomes warm, which is normal for the system.
The electronics utilize a heat sink as a means to provide the
correct operating environment temperature for the LCD display
even in sub-zero weather. If you are in these colder conditions,
the display may not be visible until the keypad has transferred
enough heat. This process can take a few minutes upon
powering up the telescope. While severe cold weather is not
damaging to the electronics, it is advised to keep the keypad in
a warmer area to allow immediate proper display performance.
7
1
8
2
9
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
Fig. 6: Keypad Hand Controller. (1) ENTER Key; (2) MODE
Key; (3) GO TO Key; (4) Direction Keys;(5) RETURN Key;
(6) Speed Keys; (7) Red LED Light; (8) Display; (9) Focus
Key; (10) Object Keys; (11) MAP Key; (12) PREVIOUS and
NEXT Keys.
The LX200 keypad buttons are described as follows:
1. ENTER Key
The ENTER key (1, Fig. 6) is used to select a menu file, a file
option, or to edit a value. To select a file or an option, press and
release the ENTER key. The LX200 will give a short beep tone
and perform the action that you have requested. To edit a
value, press and hold the ENTER key until a double beep tone
is heard and a blinking cursor appears in the display. There are
some other specific situations where the ENTER key is used.
These are described in detail where necessary. From now on,
the two types of presses will be called ‘press’ and ‘press and
hold.”
2. MODE Key
The MODE key (2, Fig.6) cycles through the five modes of the
LX200, and is used to exit from specific menu files.
3. GO TO Key
The GO TO key (3, Fig. 6) causes the LX200 to automatically
slew to specific library entry coordinates. The GO TO key also
produces a blinking cursor in the GO TO menu file of the
COORDINATES/GO TO mode, to allow new Right Ascension
and Declination coordinates to be entered.
4. Direction Keys
Labeled N, S, E, and W, (4, Fig. 6) these four keys make the
LX200 move, or slew, in a specific direction, with an option of
four different speeds, explained later. During entry to change a
value, the E and W keys can be used to move the blinking
cursor back and forth across the LCD display, so that if an error
is made during entry, it can be erased and changed.
The remaining 12 keys have multiple functions, there are up
and down arrow keys, and numbered keys from 0 through 9.
Each one of these keys also has alternate functions listed
above the arrow symbols and numbers. The ALT LED light is
only visible when entering numerical data. A description of the
individual keys follows:
5. Speed Keys (SLEW, FIND, CENTER, and GUIDE)
These keys (6, Fig. 6) allow you to set the rate of movement
(slew) speed in the drives of the LX200, as activated by the N,
S, E, and W keys. The chosen rate is indicated by the speed
indicator illuminated LED beside the rate key that you have
pressed. the speed rates are SLEW (4 degrees per second),
FIND (1 degrees per second), CNTR (16X sidereal rate), and
GUIDE (2X sidereal rate).
NOTE: All of the slew speeds will drive the LX200 in all four
directions, except for GUIDE. The 2X sidereal speed in GUIDE
has one difference in that it will not interrupt the Right
Ascension tracking direction to make Easterly (for Northern
hemisphere) or Westerly (for Southern hemisphere)
adjustments; it will merely slow down the tracking drive to one
half its normal speed. You will find, however, that the slower
drive will move the image opposite of the tracking direction,
without disturbing the smooth drive action. This performance is
absolutely essential when making astrophotographs.
SLEW, FIND, CENTER, and GUIDE keys also have numbers
listed 7, 4, 1, and 0 respectively. When editing a value, the
multiple function of each of these keys is realized. SLEW and
FIND are also used to set the “fast” focus speed for the electric
focuser accessory option, while CNTR and GUIDE set the
“slow” focus speed. There are other special functions for the
CNTR and GUIDE keys that are discussed in the RET KEY
operations.
6. RET Key
Typically used for guiding the LX200 during an
astrophotograph, the RET key (5, Fig. 6) is used to change the
brightness and pulse rate of the optional corded style
illuminated reticle eyepiece. Pressing either the PREV and
NEXT (up and down arrow) keys while holding down the RET
key, alters the reticle brightness level up or down.
When guiding on very faint stars, you may find it helpful to
pulse the light from the LED so that the reticle crosshairs blink
on and off. You will be able to adjust the reticle brightness as
well as adjust the pulse rates. There are three pulse rates that
can be used, all with a one second pulse interval. The
continuous illumination control and pulse rates are set by
holding down the RET key and pressing one of the following
keys; GUIDE (100% on, no pulsing), CNTR (50% on, 50% off),
MAP (25% on, 75% off), CNGC (10% on, 90% off).
- 15 -
7. FOCUS Key
The FOCUS key (9, Fig. 6) allows 2 speed electric focus control
of the optional Meade #1206 Electric Focuser (or equivalent
corded electric focusers such as the Meade Model #1200A). To
activate, press either the SLEW or FIND key (for fast focusing),
or the CNTR or GUIDE key (for slow focusing), press and hold
the FOCUS key, and then press and hold the PREV or NEXT
keys for near and far focus.
8. MAP Key
The Map key (11, Fig. 6) turns on and off the red LED
‘flashlight’ that is located at the top of the keypad. The deep red
LED light will protect your night vision while you search for a
particular accessory or examine a star chart.
9. Object Keys (M, STAR, and CNGC)
These keys (10, Fig. 6) allow direct access to the LX200’s
Object Library any time that you are not editing a value or
setting a parameter, or selecting a file menu. Use the Object
keys when you are at a “top level” of a mode. After pressing one
of these keys, the keypad’s display will give a blinking cursor,
allowing you to enter the catalog number for objects listed in
the library (see APPENDIX C, page 31). After entry press the
ENTER key. To see the entered object press the GO TO key. A
brief description of the catalog key symbols are; M (Messier
objects), STAR (stars and planets), and CNGC (Computerized
New General Catalog).
The 16" LX200 has several object libraries which are accessed
with the STAR and CNGC keys.
When you press the STAR or CNGC keys, the display will show
which object library you are currently in and wait for a number
entry, as described above.
To switch to a different library, press the ENTER key instead of
entering a number.
The keypad display will show a menu of libraries available.
Move the cursor to the desired library and press ENTER to
select.
The 16" LX200 will “remember” the database you last
accessed. Each time you press the STAR or CNGC keys, the
same object database will be displayed on the first line of the
keypad display.
10. PREV AND NEXT Keys
The PREV and NEXT (up and down arrow) keys (12, Fig. 6)
move the display LCD arrow up and down the menu files and
menu file options, so that you may choose an individual
selection to enter. These keys are also used when adjusting the
RET brightness range, or when activating the electric focuser.
PREV and NEXT work as well to select the objects from the
Object Library when using START FIND.
1
2
3
4
THE LX200 POWER PANEL
The power panel incorporates a power switch and LED
indicators showing power on with a current ammeter to show
power draw.
The power panel has all of the connectors for the AC or DC
power input, the DEC Motor, and the keypad. There are
connectors designed to accept optional accessories such as a
CCD autoguiding camera, the optional Meade Field DeRotator, the Meade #1206 Electric Focuser, and an illuminated
reticle eyepiece. There is even a connector for RS-232
communication that will allow you to perform every function of
the keypad from your personal computer. An illustration and a
description of the 16” LX200 power panel features follows:
1. ON/OFF Switch
When the ON/OFF Switch (7, Fig. 7) is moved to the ON
position, the power light indicator, the Current Ammeter, and
the keypad all light up. You will hear the drive motors rev which
momentarily pegs the Ammeter, then the drive motors shift to a
slower speed which allows the RA worm gear to find its
centering position for calibrating the Smart Drive, then
resuming to an even slower tracking speed. The keypad
display reads “Meade,” then the version of the software is
indicated briefly before defaulting to the TELESCOPE/OBJECT
LIBRARY. Within 15 seconds, the planetary orbital calculations
with their corresponding apparent sizes and magnitudes, and
current stellar precession calculations are made. Every
computer function is checked, and the LX200 diagnostics are
complete.
2. N/S Switch
The recessed N/S Switch (8, Fig.7) converts the LX200 for
operation in the Northern or Southern hemisphere, making the
drive reverse its’ tracking direction. Before power up, the
appropriate N or S switch position should be made, as the
LX200 will not recognize a change made on the N/S switch
afterwards. Use a pen or small tool to slide the switch
appropriately. Be sure before you travel across the equator,
that you are setting the proper + or - latitude SITE entry for your
final destination.
3. Ammeter
The Ammeter display (1, Fig. 7) is a series of vertical red LED
bars. Each bar that is fully lit represents 0.3 ampere (300 milliamperes) of current draw. The LED Ammeter represents its
lowest value on the extreme left of the scale. During normal
tracking speeds, the Ammeter will show about three fully lit LED
bars and at times a fourth that is partially lit, indicating about
900 to 1000 milli-amps or 0.9 to 1.0 amps of current draw
(when a slew is initiated, the ammeter will peg the scale
momentarily showing the inertia load, this effect is entirely
normal). The current draw information can be useful if you are
trying to calculate how much battery life you will have during an
observing session. As an example,
if the ammeter has four bars lit,
indicating 1.2 amps and you are
using a 12 amp hour battery, then to
7
know the approximate number of
hours of life the battery would yield
8
by dividing 12 by 1.2. This indicates
a battery life of 10 hours.
9
5
10
6
11
Fig. 7: 16” LX200 Power Panel. (1) Ammeter; (2) RS-232 Connector; 3) Aux Connector;
(4) Focuser Connector; (5) Reticle Connector; (6) Keypad Connector; (7) ON/OFF Switch,
(8) N/S Switch; (9) 12v DC Power Connector; (10) CCD Connector; (11) DEC Motor Connector.
4. DEC Motor Connector
The DEC Motor Port (11, Fig. 7) is a
DB-9 socket, designed to accept
the supplied coil cord. One end of
the supplied coil cord plugs in to the
power panel and the other plugs
into the DEC MOTOR socket in the
right fork arm to power the
declination motor.
- 16 -
MODE FUNCTIONS
5. CCD Connector
The CCD Port (10, Fig. 7) allows direct interface from popular
aftermarket CCD autoguiding/imaging cameras with their
compatible connecting cables to accomplish autoguiding for
non-attended astrophotography. The CCD cameras effectively
watch a star and detect slight movements. When star
movements are detected, signals from the CCD electronics
make drive corrections in the LX200, to bring the star to a home
position.
Most CCD autoguiding/imaging cameras are supplied with a
cable which is compatible with the LX200 port. If your CCD unit
does not have a cable, one can be obtained from the CCD
manufacturer, or you can make your own cable using the
following table of information.
CCD
Connector Pin
LX200
Assignment
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
Normally Closed
West
North
Ground
South
East
6. Power 12 vDC Connector
The power 12 vDC connector (9, Fig. 7) is designed to accept
either the standard-equipment AC Converter or the optional DC
Power Cord. The acceptable voltage range (under load) is from
12 to 18 volts.
7. Keypad Connector
The keypad connector (6, Fig. 7) is a 4 pin phone jack
connector socket, designed to accept standard 4 pin phone
jack coil cords. One end of the supplied coil cord plugs into the
keypad port, the other end plugs into the LX200 keypad.
8. Reticle Connector
The Reticle connector (5, Fig. 7) accepts optional accessory
corded, plug-in style illuminated reticle eyepieces such as the
optional Meade 12mm Illuminated Reticle Eyepiece, or the
Meade Series 4000 Plössl 9mm Illuminated Reticle Eyepiece
(corded style), to allow brightness control and on/off pulsing
rates to be set from the LX200 keypad.
9. Focuser Connector
The focuser connector (4, Fig. 7) accepts optional accessory
corded, plug in style electric focusers such as the Meade
#1206 Electric Focuser, to allow electric focus adjustment
control from the LX200 keypad.
10. RS-232 Connector
The RS-232 connector (2, Fig. 7) allows personal computer
interface to allow communications at 9600 baud to access
every feature of the LX200 keypad. Many popular astronomy
programs are available which directly interface with Meade
LX200 telescopes, including Epoch 2000sk Sky Software by
Meade Instruments Corp. In APPENDIX F (page 58) of this
manual is a wiring schematic to make your own RS-232
connector cord, a cord test program, a demonstration program,
and the LX200 Command Set for writing programs. Meade
Instruments supplies this information for professional
programmers. Meade Instruments Corporation does not offer
support or advice for writing software for the RS-232 option.
To view the separate modes within the LX200 system, press
the MODE button located between the ENTER and GO TO
keys at the top of the hand controller. Simple entry and editing
of information in the different modes contained within the
system, will customize the operation of your LX200 to perform
virtually any of your observing requirements. Better still, all of
the critical information such as time, location, alignment type,
and many other functions are kept in memory...even with the
LX200 turned off!
The type of alignment, the objects that you see, the location
that you observe from, the tracking speeds of the drives, all of
the clock and timing functions, the position information, and
even the brightness level of the backlit keypad are defined by
the information that you give and/ or the commands that you
edit, through five different modes of the LX200 computerized
hand controller.
Once you have selected the desired mode, you can then select
the individual file within the mode by pressing the PREV or
NEXT key (up and down arrow key) in the bottom right hand
portion of the hand controller, moving the LCD arrow up or
down beside the file description. Although you will only be able
to see two menu selections at a time in the keypad display, you
will see more as you continue to press the PREV and NEXT
keys.
When the desired file is chosen, press the ENTER key to view
the files menu. To choose an individual menu, again use the
PREV or NEXT key to run the LCD arrow up or down the files
menu. To explore a menu selection, again press the ENTER
key. In some modes there will be options for a files menu
selection, in others you will only enter data.
At any time that you wish to return to main file heading in a
particular mode, just press MODE and it will behave as an exit
key.
1. Mode One: TELESCOPE/ OBJECT LIBRARY
This is the mode that the LX200 will default to after the
instrument completes its self-check, when the LX200 is first
turned on. The TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY mode can be
thought of as command central. It is here that we can select the
way that we want the LX200 to perform mechanically, and
where we can explore and select from its extensive library of
stored objects.
To explore either the TELESCOPE menu file or the OBJECT
LIBRARY menu file, move the LCD arrow to the appropriate
selection by using the PREV or the NEXT key and press the
ENTER key.
a. TELESCOPE Menu File
Below are the 14 selections of the TELESCOPE menu file,
illustrating the individual menu files and file options.
1.
You can choose any one of the four site options (or the
UNKNOWN site) at your convenience, without the bother
of entering longitude and latitude every time you use the
LX200. Once the site is chosen, exit the SITE menu by
pressing the MODE key.
11. Aux Connector
The Auxiliary connector (3, Fig. 7) is used for the 7" Maksutov
fan power.
SITE: The SITE menu option allows you to enter up to four
of your favorite viewing locations in longitude and latitude.
The entered longitude and latitude is compared by the
LX200’s computer to your local time, GMT offset, and
calendar date to accurately calculate celestial
coordinates. Once entered, the information is stored in the
telescope’s internal memory, you need never re-enter the
same information. To enter new site information or to
change an old one, see QUICK START, page 9.
2.
ALIGN: The Align menu selection of the TELESCOPE file
demonstrates the unique ability to transform the LX200
into an Altazimuth, celestial tracking telescope, a polarequatorial celestial tracking telescope, or land spotting
scope with electric Altazimuth movements within three
- 17 options, which are; ALTAZ, POLAR, and LAND.
TELESCOPE mode and press the ENTER key.
Assuming that you have already entered correct local
time, latitude, and longitude (see QUICK START, page 9)
you are ready to choose a particular type of alignment, by
pressing the NEXT or PREV key to run the arrow beside
the desired option of ALTAZ, POLAR, or LAND, and then
pressing the ENTER key. The display will then give you
specific instructions from this point that will literally walk
you through the chosen alignment type.
Ignore the keypad display instructions to return the
telescope to 90 degrees in Declination and 00 HA.
Instead, press the GO TO key and the LX200 will
slew to the calculated position of where the pole star
should be.
ALTAZ: ALTAZ (Altazimuth) requires that you mount
the LX200 directly to the top of the field tripod (with
the power panel facing North), and adjust the leg
extensions of the tripod until the instrument is level.
You are then required to align on one or two of the
bright stars in its look up table of 33 alignment stars.
This allows your LX200 to track in altitude and
azimuth simultaneously for visual observations, or
very brief (under five minutes) exposure
astrophotography or CCD imaging (longer exposures
will require the Field De-Rotator). ALTAZ allows you
to fully access the Object Library as well as all other
telescope functions. Complete instructions for using
ALTAZ are in the QUICK START (page 9).
Press the ENTER key, and the LX200 will once again
slew to a bright star overhead. Center this star using
the N, S, E, or W keys, then press ENTER.
a.
b.
POLAR: POLAR allows you to use the 16” LX200
(mounted on a permanent pier set to your latitude) as
an equatorial telescope. With the LX200 powered up,
the POLAR file option selected, and the field tripod
leveled, the telescope should be adjusted so that the
Declination setting circle (3, Fig. 1) is set to 90
degrees and the telescope is rotated to the 00 hour
angle (HA) position in Right Ascension. In this
position, the viewfinder (Fig. 1) is up-side down, and
the R.A. pointer (4, Fig. 5), the 00 line of the R.A.
setting circle (3, Fig. 5), and the HA pointer (5, Fig. 5)
all line up. (If you do not start at the 00 H.A. position,
the telescope will point to the ground instead of the
sky, when the keypad display chooses its second
star.) Press the ENTER key and the LX200 will
determine and slew to the precise off-set of the pole
star in Declination and Right Ascension.
At this point you need only aim the instrument at the
pole star (see APPENDIX C, page 31, if the pole star
is not visible) and center it in the eyepiece field using
only the altitude and azimuth adjustments on the
pier. Once done, you again press the ENTER key
and the LX200 will choose and slew to a very bright
star that is overhead and can usually be seen in the
field of view of the viewfinder. At this point, center the
bright star using only the Right Ascension and
Declination adjustments of the telescope (either
manually by loosening the locks only or electrically),
then press ENTER. You can now access every every
function of the LX200.
c.
Refined Polar Alignment: Astrophotographers
routinely require polar alignments of the highest
accuracy for the finest guiding characteristics. Your
initial polar alignment can be refined by using the
LX200’s electronics by using a slightly different
method in the POLAR menu option. The steps
outlined below should be performed in two or three 15
minute intervals. At each interval the telescope will
slew to the area where the pole star should be
centered in the optics. You may find that the pole star
is somewhat off-center in the eyepiece showing the
alignment error that may have been made during your
initial setup. Re-center the pole star during each
interval using the tripod adjustments only (see
APPENDIX B, page 29) in altitude and azimuth, then
follow the rest of the routine.
Return to the POLAR menu option in the
Re-center the pole star in the field of view in the
eyepiece using only the adjustments on the pier in
altitude and azimuth.
NOTE: Pressing the MODE key at any point in the
alignment routine aborts the routine and exit to the top
menu.
After each 15 minute interval you will find that the
pole star becomes more accurately centered each
time. You can repeat the intervals as often as you like
to obtain the highest accuracy. An optional
illuminated reticle crosshair eyepiece makes the job
of centering the star easy.
There may be situations when it is impossible to see
the pole star due to something blocking your line of
sight. On such an occasion, just press the ENTER
key for the POLAR option so that it has a check next
to it, then follow the instructions in Precise Polar
Alignment, page 30. You will require the use of an
illuminated reticle crosshair eyepiece* to complete
the task. Once finished, follow the steps below for a
permanently mounted LX200 section to access the
Object Library.
d.
The Permanently Mounted, Polar Aligned LX200:
For those who will permanently mount the LX200 in
an observatory, or wish to use the already polar
aligned telescope for several nights in succession, it
is recommended that a high precision polar
alignment be made with one of the methods
described above. Once done, however, you need not
bother yourself to go through a polar alignment
routine on successive nights (provided that you do
not move the instrument on the pier) to access the
Object Library and enjoy near perfect tracking.
To bypass the polar alignment sequence, follow the
steps outlined below:
•
Return to the POLAR menu option and place a check
next to it by pressing the ENTER key.
•
Then directly enter the catalog number of an object
that you are familiar with in the sky by pressing the
M, STAR, or CNGC key (see APPENDIX D, page 34,
for information on the Object Library) and press the
ENTER key again.
•
Manually center the familiar object in the eyepiece of
the telescope.
•
Press and hold the ENTER key until the display
reads “Coordinates matched.”
You have now synchronized the Object Library and
the LX200 will correctly access every other object in
the sky.
e.
LAND: The LAND menu option transforms the
ALTAZ (Altazimuth) mounted LX200 into an electric
slewing spotting scope. In this mode, continuous
tracking is canceled and all of the celestial modes
and menus are non-functional, showing lower case
lettering in the displays and a beep tone if you try to
enter one of them.
The LX200 will slew at any one of the four speeds of
SLEW, FIND, CNTR, and GUIDE as activated by
pressing the appropriately marked keys on the left
- 18 side of the keypad. Altazimuth coordinate readings
can still be displayed in the coordinates mode (see
MODE 2, page 22). Refer to QUICK START (page 9)
for the LAND menu option, for full operating
procedures. You will also find that the addition of the
Meade #928 45-Degree Erect Image Prism or the
Meade #924 Porro Prism instead of the standard
supplied star diagonal prism, will give the normal
right-side-up and left-to-right views that you are
accustomed to when using a spotting scope.
3.
SMART: The SMART menu file controls the Smart Drive
and allows you to train almost all of the periodic error from
the Right Ascension drive worm gear (errors induced by
tiny gear imperfections that tend to slightly speed up or
slow down the drive tracking speed, that occur in a regular
8 minute pattern, or for every rotation of the worm) for
greatly enhancing the tracking characteristics or the
amount of East and West drift of your LX200. This greatly
simplifies guiding during astrophotography. The menu
also has provisions for correcting Declination drift. Smart
Drive will retain the training given to the R/A drive, even
after the telescope is turned off. There is of course a way
to erase any training given to it at your command.
The SMART menu has five options. They are; LEARN,
UPDATE, ERASE, DEC LEARN, and DEC CORRECT. To
use the Smart Drive, the LX200 must be mounted with the
optional equatorial wedge (see APPENDIX A, page 25),
equipped with an illuminated reticle eyepiece*, and used
in the POLAR align menu selection. Be sure to train the
Smart Drive in the 60.1 Hz Quartz setting that the LX200
will be automatically set at power up. Thereafter, you can
adjust this setting in the TIMER/ FREQ mode and still
enjoy the periodic error correction.
Once a polar alignment has been completed, your LX200
will point to a bright star overhead that will be near the
Celestial Equator. This will be a good star to train the
Smart Drive on. You can of course, move to another star
just as long as you are near 0 degrees in declination and
more or less overhead in Right Ascension. Now is good
time to set the brightness and/ or the pulse rate (see THE
LX200 KEYPAD HAND CONTROLLER, page 14) of the
illuminated reticle on the guide star and practice guiding
for a few minutes.
To actually begin training the Smart Drive, move the LCD
arrow to LEARN by using the PREV or NEXT key and
press ENTER. There will be numbers that will appear next
to the LEARN display, that will begin counting down to
zero. The highest number that can appear is 240. The
period of the worm is eight minutes and the number
represents a sector of the worm wheel which will change
to the next lower digit every two seconds. As the keypad
display approaches sector 5, an alarm will alert you that
training is about to commence. At this point try to keep the
star on the same location of the crosshair during the eight
minute training sequence by pressing the N, S, E, and W
keys. After eight minutes, the training is over and Smart
Drive will play back the drive corrections automatically,
dramatically improving the R.A. drive tracking.
If you wish to further refine the accuracy, move the LCD
arrow to UPDATE and press ENTER and follow the same
instructions as above. This can be done in UPDATE as
many times as you wish. With each training the Smart
Drive will average your training sequences.
If you find that you have made a mistake in training (e.g.
pushed E instead of W when you should have), you can
eliminate the memory by moving the LCD arrow to
ERASE and press ENTER.
A star that drifts consistently North or South during
guiding, can also be corrected for. Move the LCD arrow to
DEC LEARN and press ENTER. Begin making drive
corrections immediately by pressing any of the direction
(N, S, E, W) keys to keep the star on the crosshair of the
guiding eyepiece. It is suggested that you train in DEC
LEARN for at least half of your intended exposure time for
an astrophoto. The longer that you train, the more
accurate the DEC LEARN will be. Once the desired time
is finished, press ENTER and the training will cease. The
Smart Drive will then determine how many key pushes
that you gave in N and S and choose the direction based
from which direction received more commands. It then
averages the time between key pushes in the chosen
direction. In this way, the Smart Drive can correct for
Declination drift (should your polar alignment be slightly
off), or will allow you to more precisely guide on nonstellar objects, such as comets, asteroids, etc.
To play back your DEC LEARN training, move the LCD
arrow to DEC CORRECT and press ENTER. To halt the
play back press ENTER again. To erase the DEC LEARN
training, either move the LCD arrow back to DEC LEARN
and press ENTER twice or turn the LX200 off.
4.
12/24 HR: The 12/24 HR menu selection of the
TELESCOPE file simply toggles between a 12 and 24
hour display of local time in the time mode.
To toggle between 12 and 24 hours displays, move the
arrow to 12/24HR and press ENTER. To return to the
original setting, press ENTER again.
5.
HELP: The HELP menu selection of the TELESCOPE file
is an electronic mini-manual that will briefly describe the
function of each command key on the LX200 keypad.
To use this menu, move the arrow with the PREV or
NEXT key to HELP and press ENTER. To read the lines
of text, use the PREV and NEXT keys. To exit, press
MODE.
6.
REVERSE N/S: The REVERSE N/S menu selection of
the TELESCOPE file reverses the direction of the
telescope in North and South movements (e.g., when you
press the N key the scope will move South or down
instead of North or up). This is especially useful during
some guiding applications in imaging and observing.
To use the REVERSE N/S menu, move the arrow to
REVERSE N/S and press ENTER. If you wish to return
the direction commands to the original setting, press
ENTER again.
7.
REVERSE E/W: The REVERSE E/W menu selection of
the TELESCOPE file reverses the direction of the
telescope in East and West movements (e.g., when you
press the W key, the telescope will move East instead of
West).
To use the REVERSE E/W menu, move the arrow to
REVERSE E/W and press ENTER. If you wish to return
the direction commands to the original setting, press
ENTER again.
8.
BALANCE: When adding optional equipment to the
LX200, like a heavy camera, it is often necessary to
rebalance the telescope using the Meade #1404 Tube
Balance Weight Systems.
Selecting option #8 from the TELESCOPE menu moves
the LX200 telescope rapidly up and down in Declination.
This provides an easy way to determine when the
telescope is balanced in the Declination axis.
(Remember, loosening the Dec. lock to check the balance
will cause the LX200 to lose alignment.)
When the telescope is out of balance, the LX200 will draw
more current when slewing in the “heavy” direction and
the Dec. motor will sound different.
After selecting option #8, watch the Ammeter and listen to
the Declination motor to determine when the LX200 is
balanced.
- 19 9.
HI-PRECISION: The High-Precision Pointing feature of
LX200 allows for very precise pointing of the telescope.
By incorporating the unique LX200 SYNC command, 0.3
arc-sec resolution encoders, and high-speed DC servo
motors, observers can now place objects in the
telescope’s field of view with 1 arc-minute or better
pointing accuracy. This makes critical image placement
applications, such as CCD imaging, possible.
Normal telescope pointing accuracy is better than 5 arcminutes when doing a casual alignment, which is more
than accurate enough for most observing applications. (A
“casual” alignment is one that uses the UNKNOWN SITE
or one that is done without the use of a reticle eyepiece to
exactly center the alignment stars.) This type of alignment
will put objects into the field of view of most eyepieces
and is more than adequate for almost any visual
observing application.
A “critical” alignment will improve the pointing accuracy of
the telescope to 2 arc-minutes or better. This type of
alignment requires accurate SITE information, time, date,
proper selection of the two alignment stars, and a reticle
eyepiece to exactly center the alignment stars. These
steps generally require only a few extra seconds to
accomplish, and will improve the telescope’s positioning
by a substantial amount. Using the “critical” alignment will
provide telescope positioning suitable for all but the most
demanding pointing applications — including CCD
imaging with larger chip cameras, like the Meade Pictor
416 and Pictor 1616 CCD cameras.
The HI-PRECISION feature increases the pointing
accuracy of the LX200 to 1 arc-minute or better and also
requires the “critical” alignment described above. This will
yield the best pointing accuracy possible, placing objects
onto the active area of the even the smallest CCD
cameras available.
NOTE: If this star is not in the field of view or if it is obstructed
by a land object, the other two stars are available. Use the
PREV and NEXT keys to cycle through the three closest stars.
c.
The telescope will slew to the selected object or
position.
10. SLEW RATE: Option #10 in the TELESCOPE menu is for
changing the slew rate of the LX200 telescope. Slowing
down the slew rate will result in less noise as the
telescope moves and will also use a little less power. To
change the slew rate, follow these steps:
a.
Press the MODE key on the keypad until the
TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY menu appears.
The cursor should be next to the TELESCOPE
option — if not, press the PREV key to move the
cursor up one space.
b.
Press ENTER to select the TELESCOPE functions.
c.
Press the PREV or NEXT keys to move the cursor to
option #10: SLEW RATE. On the right hand part of
the display, the number 4 is displayed. This
represents the current slew rate in degrees per
second.
d.
Press the ENTER key to change the slew rate. Each
successive ENTER key press increments the slew
rate by 1 degree per second.
e.
After setting the desired rate, press the MODE key to
return to the TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY menu.
NOTE: The slew rate is NOT stored in permanent memory and
needs to be reset each time the telescope is powered up. The
default slew rate is 4 degrees per second.
11. BACKLASH: The Backlash feature is only available in the
POLAR mode.
It should be stressed that for most applications, using the
HP feature is NOT required to get maximum enjoyment
out of the telescope. For an evening of simple visual
observations, the “casual” alignment is all that is required.
Don’t let the pointing precision of the telescope become
more important than the fun of observing the night sky!
When taking long exposure astrophotographs, it is
necessary to “guide” the photograph to make sure the
telescope is tracking perfectly, otherwise stars will appear
as ovals instead of pinpoints. This is done by setting the
LX200 keypad to the GUIDE speed, monitoring the star
location (e.g. with an off-axis guider), and making small
corrections to the telescope position by using the N, S, E,
and W keys.
The High-Precision Pointing mode requires the “critical”
alignment, described above, to maximize the telescope’s
pointing ability. The LX200 default condition is with HP
disabled. To activate the HP mode, select the “hiprecision” option from the TELESCOPE menu (option #9).
When selected, “HI-PRECISION” will change to upper
case letters.
When making these corrections, the R.A. motor will speed
up or slow down (by pressing the “E” and “W” keys). The
Declination motor, however, when activated (by pressing
the “N” and “S” keys) will actually stop and reverse
direction. Because of backlash in the Declination motor
gearbox, there will be a few seconds delay before the
telescope begins to move when reversing direction.
When HP is active, the LX200 automatically does several
things whenever a GO TO is initiated.
The Dec. backlash feature compensates for the Dec.
motor gearbox backlash and provides instant telescope
movement when the motor is reversed.
a.
HP will search the alignment star database and find
the three closest stars to the object (or position)
entered. This process takes about 10 seconds and
the keypad will show Display 26:
Display 26
b.
a.
HI-PRECISION
Searching. . .
The telescope will slew to the nearest alignment
star. These are all bright (brighter than 3rd
magnitude) stars and far enough apart to insure
that there will only be one in the field of view.
The keypad display will show Display 27:
Display 27
To program the Dec. backlash, use this procedure:
Center STAR XXX
then press GO TO
Using a reticle eyepiece, center the star in the field of
view. (Or center the star on the CCD chip if using a
CCD camera.) Press GO TO when the star is
centered.
Move to option #11 from the TELESCOPE menu.
The keypad display will show:
“’11) BACKLASH 00”
The “00” in the display shows the number of arcseconds of backlash the LX200 is set to compensate
for (the default setting is 0 arc-seconds).
b.
While observing a star at high power, time the
Declination movement delay when reversing the
motor directions (by pressing the “N” and “S” keys).
Typical values are 2 to 4 seconds.
c.
The GUIDE speed for the Declination motor is 15
arc-seconds per second. Therefore, multiply the
number of seconds delay by 15.
d.
Press and hold the ENTER key for 1 second. The
keypad will beep and a blinking cursor will appear on
the keypad display. Enter the number determined in
- 20 step c, above. Press ENTER when the number is
entered.
e.
Press the ENTER key and the hand control will display the
first object in its finding sequence. This first object is
selected by the LX200, based off of where the instrument
is pointing in the sky when you entered START FIND. To
point your LX200 to the object displayed, press the GO TO
key and it will slew to the object.
Check the time delay as described in step b. If there
is a delay, increase the compensation number. If
there is a slight jump when reversing direction, then
the number is too large.
While in the START FIND option, you can either choose
the next object in line or skip it as you wish. In order to find
the next object in sequence, press the NEXT key, and the
display will show the new CNGC object. If you do not wish
to view this object, press NEXT again. If you wish to return
to a previously viewed object, press the PREV key until
the desired catalog number is displayed and press the GO
TO key. If you have set some limitations in the
PARAMETERS option, it will only find those objects within
your chosen confines.
When the compensation number is correct, the
LX200 telescope will move almost instantly when
reversing the direction in Declination. This
compensation feature also works in conjunction with
popular CCD autoguiders, allowing for more
accurate autoguiding.
This number is stored in permanent memory and
should never need to be set again.
b. OBJECT LIBRARY Menu File
If you find that the object is not well centered in the
eyepiece after executing a GO TO (due to poor leveling,
improper time input, or errors in site location), center the
object; then press and hold the ENTER key until the
display reads “Coordinates Matched.” This feature in
essence synchronizes the LX200 for an area of the sky, so
that the next object (if the leveling, time input, or site
location information is not corrected) will be better
centered, provided it is not too far away from the object
that you matched coordinates to.
The OBJECT LIBRARY menu file is the other half of the
TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY mode. With it you can
become a tourist of the sky, or conduct research surveys of the
64,359 objects. The LX200 Object Library is accessible in the
most results-getting, user friendly system ever designed for
observers and astrophotographers.
The core library, essentially a “greatest hits of the sky,”
encompasses eight planets of our solar system from Mercury
to Pluto, 351 stars (doubles, variables, pole stars), the entire
Messier catalog of 110 objects, 7840 of the finest galaxies,
diffuse and planetary nebulae, and globular and open star
clusters
The position epoch of these objects is for real time, updated
each time you turn on your LX200. Even the planet’s positions
have their orbits calculated! This not only qualifies the LX200
as the most accurate integrated object library available, it will
never require updated software for precession of the stars or
planetary orbital changes.
There are three primary ways to use the Object Library. You
can directly access the library by using the M, STAR, or CNGC
keys (see THE LX200 KEYPAD HAND CONTROLLER, page 14) and
entering a specific catalog number, the START FIND option can
be used to logically find objects in organized strips of the sky
that can be custom tailored to only show the objects you wish
to see with a selection of object types, size brightness, etc., or
you can scan the sky and have the Object Library tell you what
is in the field of view in the eyepiece by using the FIELD option.
Below is a description of the four OBJECT LIBRARY menu files
and file options:
To access the OBJECT LIBRARY menu file, move the arrow to
the OBJECT LIBRARY display by pressing the PREV or NEXT
key while in the TELESCOPE/OBJECT LIBRARY mode and
press the ENTER key. Now you can access the four menu
selections within the OBJECT LIBRARY by moving the arrow to
the desired menu selection by using the PREV or NEXT keys
and doing the following steps.
1.
2.
OBJECT INFO: Press the ENTER key to read the type,
brightness, size, and quality. Press ENTER again to read
the coordinates. Press ENTER once more to determine
how far off the telescope is pointing from the entered
object (this is displayed in LCD bars, each bar is ten
degrees, or if it is on the object, no bars). This same
information can also be accessed at any time by pressing
the ENTER key for any object entered by the M, STAR, or
CNGC keys. Press MODE to exit to the main menu file.
START FIND: The START FIND option resources the
CNGC objects within the Object Library and begins a
logical search starting wherever the telescope is
positioned when activated. To cover the entire visible sky
it will make 31 strip divisions about 12° wide, moving from
West to East, from the North Pole to the South Pole, then
South to North. Once it has found all of the CNGC objects
it will repeat its sequence until new objects are visible.
To exit the START FIND menu selection (and cease its
operation) to the main menu, press MODE.
3.
FIELD: Press the ENTER key to identify objects in the
field of view of the telescope. The LX200 will display the
object centered in the eyepiece field, and how many other
NGC objects are in the field at the same time (defined by
the RADIUS parameter setting) as shown in Display 28:
Display 28
Objects: 5
Center: CNGC 4438
Press the ENTER button to reveal information about the
object as shown in Display 29:
Display 29
CNGC 4438 VG GAL
MAG 10.1 SZ 9.3’
Display 29 is interpreted; COMPUTERIZED NEW
GENERAL CATALOG Object #4438, VERY GOOD,
GALAXY, MAGNITUDE 10.1, SIZE 9.3’ (in arc minutes).
Press ENTER again to read the coordinate location of the
object (notice the * legend next to RA coordinate number,
it indicates the catalog coordinates of the object, not
necessarily where the telescope is pointing) as shown in
Display 30:
Display 30
RA = 12:27.2*
DEC = +13'03
Press ENTER once more to see physically how far your
telescope will have to move to acquire the object entered.
The display will show LED bars, each bar represents ten
degrees of movement as shown in Display 31:
Display 31
■■■■
■
If you are centered on the object already, such as if you
are in the FIELD menu selection, or if you have already
made a GO TO command in one of the other methods for
finding an object, the above display will be blank.
To review any of the data of an object, continue to press
ENTER until the desired field appears. You can use these
commands at any time that you have an object entered in
the keypad, while directly entering in specific objects by
pressing the M, STAR, or CNGC keys, in the START FIND
- 21 -
4.
menu selection, the OBJECT INFORMATION menu
selection, or the FIELD menu selection.
so that your LX200 will not try to find objects below
your setting.
PARAMETERS: It is here that you can edit the Press
ENTER to find eight options which can be reviewed by
scrolling through this menu selection using the PREV or
NEXT key. To edit an option, move the arrow to the
desired option and press and hold ENTER until a double
beep is heard and a blinking cursor appears (except in the
BETTER option) Where numerical values are to be input,
simply type them in from the keypad. If you make a
mistake, you can move the cursor backward using the W
key, then re-enter the data. To exit to the main option
menu, press the ENTER key once again. A description of
the eight options and how to set them is below:
Enter the number of degrees above the horizon that
will clear the obstructions in the sky. To roughly judge
how many degrees the obstruction is taking up of the
sky, merely hold your fist at arms length. Each fist
diameter is approximately 5 degrees. So, if a tree is
three fists high, you would make a setting of 15
degrees in the HIGHER setting. Once the setting is
finalized, press ENTER.
a.
d.
TYPE GPDCO: This menu file option allows you to
select the type of CNGC objects that you wish to
locate. GPDCO represent:
Enter the number of degrees from the zenith that you
want to limit. Once the setting is finalized, press
ENTER.
OBJECT SYMBOL LEGEND
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
G
GALAXIES
P
PLANETARY NEBULAE
D
DIFFUSE NEBULAE
C
GLOBULAR STAR CLUSTERS
O
OPEN STAR CLUSTERS
e.
Initially, the blinking cursor appears over the G
symbol. If you decide not to look for galaxies, press
NEXT and the symbol will change from an upper
case letter (G) to a lower case letter (g), to deselect
the GALAXIES category. If you wish to leave
GALAXIES selected, then move the blinking cursor
over to one of the other category symbols by
pressing the W or E key on the keypad. You can then
deselect the undesired categories.
BETTER: The BETTER menu file option allows you
to define the visual object quality range. At power up,
the range is set at the bottom of the scale on VP,
when using the START FIND menu selection, it will
select all objects that are very poor through super or
what could be considered an “ALL” setting. The
object quality symbols are:
f.
QUALITY SYMBOL LEGEND
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
SU
EX
VG
G
FR
PR
VP
SUPER
EXCELLENT
VERY GOOD
GOOD
FAIR
POOR
VERY POOR
HIGHER: The Higher menu file option sets the
horizon setting for the telescope. At power up, the
setting is 00 degrees, which assumes that you have
an unobstructed line-of-site to the horizon in every
direction. If, however, there are things obstructing a
level horizon, or if the sky quality is poor due to haze
or light pollution, you can set an artificial horizon level
SMALLER: This menu option is the upper size object
limit. At power up the setting is for 200 arc minutes or
3.33 degrees. This setting is high enough to cover
the largest objects in the OBJECT LIBRARY. You
may want to lower the value because of true field-ofview limitations of a particular eyepiece (see the
RADIUS parameter option for calculating true field).
Other reasons for limiting the value in SMALLER is
for astrophotographic or CCD imaging requirements
where we don’t want the object to exceed the
imaging area of the film or the CCD chip.
g.
BRIGHTER: The lower brightness limits based on
stellar magnitude can be limited in the BRIGHTER
menu. At power up, the magnitude value is set to a
very faint level of +20.0.
You may want to adjust the magnitude level to a
brighter value starting at perhaps the limiting visual
magnitude of your LX200, which is approximately
15.5 for the 16” LX200. If you are taking
astrophotographs, the limiting magnitude is about
18.0. Sky conditions also greatly affect the limiting
magnitude due to atmospheric haze, high clouds,
light pollution, or combinations thereof.
If you wish to define the object quality range to Very
Good and better, press the ENTER key until the
symbol VG is displayed. From the VP setting to VG
requires three ENTER key presses. The LX200 will
now select objects that look Very Good through
Super.
c.
LARGER: The LARGER menu file option allows
settings of the lower apparent size limit of the objects
you wish to see. At power up it is set to 000’ (arc
minutes). In order to make a decision as to the size
limits that you may impose, it helps to have a clear
understanding of exactly what an arc minute of sky
is. A good example is the apparent size of the Moon,
which could be expressed as 1/2 of a degree, 30 arc
minutes, or 1800 arc seconds. Each arc minute is 60
arc seconds, and there are 60 arc minutes for each
degree of sky.
Some beginning observers have a tough time
discerning objects less than about 1 arc minute in
size unless it is a double star or a planet.
Astrophotographers and those involved with CCD
imaging may want to set a higher value based on the
desired image scale coverage that would be most
impressive with different types of films or CCD
cameras. Enter the new value in arc minutes, then
press ENTER to exit to the option file.
If you wish to recall a category symbol, move the
blinking cursor over the symbol and press the PREV
key. After your selections are made, press ENTER.
b.
LOWER: The LOWER menu file option sets the
zenith limit setting for the telescope. At power up, the
setting is 90 degrees, which assumes that you point
the telescope straight up. If, however, you have
instruments on the telescope which will not clear the
fork arms, or if you want to avoid the 10° Field DeRotator limit, this setting can be used.
h.
FAINTER: The upper level of brightness may also be
adjusted with the FAINTER menu file option,
although you may find few applications for limiting it
to a lower value.
i.
RADIUS: The RADIUS value sets the boundaries of
what and how many objects the LX200 recognizes is
- 22 in a given eyepiece while in the FIELD menu. At
power up the RADIUS menu file option is set to 15
arc minutes, the radius of 1/2 a degree (30 arc
minutes), which is about the proper setting for a
26mm eyepiece used in an 8" f/10 LX200.
To calculate the true field of an eyepiece in the
telescope, first divide the focal length of the
telescope (e.g., 2000mm for an 8" f/10) by the focal
length of the eyepiece (the standard supplied
eyepiece is a 26mm Super Plössl, 2000 divided by
26 equals 77X magnification). Then find the apparent
field of the eyepiece (which is 52 degrees for the
26mm Super Plössl) and divide it by the
magnification (52 divided by 77 equals 0.67 degrees,
multiplied by 60 equals 40.2 arc minutes).
To get the radius of the true field of view, divide the
true field by 2. In the case of the above equation,
40.2 arc minutes divided by 2 equals 20.1 arc
minutes.
2. Mode Two: COORDINATES/GO TO
Mode Two allows you to see where you have pointed the
LX200 in two celestial coordinate formats, either R.A. and Dec.
or Altazimuth. Also in this mode you can enter new Right
Ascension and Declination coordinates for any sky position,
perhaps to locate objects not in the LX200 library such as
comets or asteroids and have your telescope slew to the new
coordinates.
a. Coordinates Menu File
You will at first see the RA = and DEC = coordinates of where
the telescope is pointing. If you move the LX200 with the N, S,
W, or E keys, the coordinates display will immediately update
the new position in Right Ascension and Declination.
You can also display computed information of the Altazimuth
coordinates (ALT = and AZ =) by pressing the ENTER key. To
return to RA = and DEC =, press the ENTER key again.
The RA = display is broken down into hours, minutes, and
tenths of a minute, and the DEC = display is broken down into
+ for North Declination and - for South Declination into degrees
and minutes as shown in Display 32:
Display 32
RA = 02:45.9
DEC = +22'54
If you have made an ALTAZ style of alignment, the ALT = and
AZ = coordinate display is formatted so that 0 degrees azimuth
(AZ =) is due South that increases to up to 359 degrees and 59
minutes moving clockwise, or from due South moving Westerly.
altitude (ALT =) is formatted so that straight overhead is +90
degrees and 00 minutes, decreasing to +00 degrees, and 00
minutes as you move the telescope level with the horizon, and
then as the LX200 moves below +00.00 it will give minus
altitude readings. The Altazimuth coordinate display is shown in
Display 33:
Display 33
ALT = +72'50
AZ = 158'10
While in ALTAZ, you will find during slewing in one direction,
that both the RA = and DEC = display will change at the same
time, while the ALT = and the AZ = display will only change in
the direction that the telescope is being slewed. It is also
important to note that only the Declination setting circle (3, Fig.
1) will give a correct reading. The R.A. setting circle (10, Fig. 1)
will only give correct readings in the POLAR setting (see
APPENDIX B, page 29).
b. GO TO Menu Option
The GO TO menu option, allows you to enter new Right
Ascension and Declination coordinates of any object in the sky,
so that the LX200 will slew to the new position. With this ability,
your LX200 knows no bounds, any celestial object, including
comets, asteroids, etc. are easily found, provided you have
accurate coordinate data to refer to.
To enter a new pointing position in Right Ascension and
Declination, press the GO TO key and a double beep will be
heard followed by a blinking cursor that will appear over the RA
= coordinate numbers. At this point, type in the new Right
Ascension coordinate numbers, then press the ENTER key.
You will then notice that the blinking cursor is over the DEC =
coordinate numbers. Enter the new Declination coordinate
numbers, then press the ENTER key and the LX200 will slew
to the new coordinate position.
You can also slew to ALTAZ coordinates from the ALTAZ
display as described above.
If you need to enter a minus Declination setting, move the
blinking cursor over the + symbol with the W key and then
press the NEXT key to get the - (minus) symbol, then move the
blinking cursor to the first number with the E key and enter the
new coordinate numbers. If you are already at a minus (-)
Declination setting and wish to enter a plus (+) declination
setting, follow the same instructions as above but press the
PREV key instead to get the + symbol.
3. Mode Three: CLOCK/CALENDAR
The continuously operating clock and calendar is the life pulse
of your LX200. At power up, the telescope’s sidereal clock
automatically allows the system computer to make orbital
calculations of the planets, and correct stellar precession for
superior pointing ability.
Your accurate initial input of local time and date, with its longlife lithium battery back-up, need not be re-entered every time
you use the LX200, thus enhancing the user friendly aspects of
the instrument.
To set the local time and date and to enter the correct GMT
offset (see QUICK START, page 9). Be sure to use your local
hour setting appropriately in either 12 hour or 24 hour format as
predetermined by the 12/24 HOUR TELESCOPE menu file
option.
The long-life lithium battery (Panasonic CR2032 3 vDC or
Duracell DL2032B) is stored behind the power panel of the
Drive Base (see Behind the Power Panel, page 53 for battery
replacement information).
4. Mode Four: TIMER/FREQ
a. TIMER = Menu Option
The TIMER = menu option is for accurately timing different
observing or imaging tasks for up to 12 hours long. Counting
down to zero, in the hours, minutes, and seconds format, it will
give a pleasant beeping tone to notify you that the time is up.
To set the TIMER, move the arrow to TIMER = 00:00:00. Then
press and hold the ENTER key to get the double beep tone and
the blinking cursor. Enter the number of hours, minutes, and
seconds that you require. If you need to correct an error in
entry, use the E and W keys to move the blinking cursor and
then type in the correct information. After entry, press the
ENTER key again and the cursor will delete. When you are
ready to start your time count-down, press the ENTER key
once more. To pause the count-down press ENTER again, and
then again to resume.
If you want an automatic 12 hour countdown, press the ENTER
key without holding. Then press ENTER to countdown.
b. FREQ = Menu File
FREQ = (Frequency) allows you to adjust the tracking speed
(not slew speed) of the LX200 digitally in tenths of a hertz from
56.4 Hz to 60.1 Hz, so that you can match virtually every
celestial motion in the sky. Some popular drive rate settings
are:
- 23 FREQ RATE
DESCRIPTION
NOTES
60.1 Hz Q
Sidereal rate;
Quartz setting
Default rate at
power up. Gives
sidereal frequency
accuracy to ±.005%;
Best for astrophotos
60.0 Hz
Solar and
planetary rate
Average rate for
tracking planets;
Actual rates vary due
to retrogrades,
oppositions, etc.
57.9 Hz
Lunar rate
Best rate for
tracking the Moon
There are three menu file options in FREQ =. To see or set the
options, move the arrow to FREQ = and press ENTER. At
power up, the FREQ = default is the 60.1Hz Q setting. The
quartz rate is precisely fixed and cannot be altered. To choose
a different rate, press the ENTER key to see 60.1 M and then
again to see 60.1 M with the up and down arrow. These two
menu file options can adjust the tracking speeds. The
adjustment techniques are described below:
Display 34 shows the manual rate menu file option that can be
adjusted by pressing and holding the ENTER key to get the
double beep tone and the blinking cursor. Type in the new rate,
then when finished, press the ENTER key again.
Display 34
FREQ = 60.1 M
Display 35 shows the menu file option that allows you to step
the drive tracking frequency setting in tenths of a hertz, by
using the PREV and NEXT (up and down arrow) keys. This is
a convenient feature if you are trying to match the precise
speed of a planet, comet, or any other non-stellar object. To exit
this option, press the MODE key.
Display 35
FREQ = 60.1M ↕
5. Mode Five: KEYPAD OFF/BRIGHTNESS ADJUST
In order to see very faint objects, it will sometimes be
necessary to either dim or completely turn off the keypad red
LCD backlighting. To do so press the MODE button until the
display goes blank. This is the OFF option.
To set the keypad brightness, press the ENTER button and
adjust the brightness to your satisfaction with the PREV and
NEXT keys. To exit, press the MODE key.
This brightness setting also dims the power panel power LED
and Ammeter.
NOTE: The backlighting is done by edge lighting a plastic light
bar underneath the keypad. Four LEDs are used and do not
give a perfectly even backlighting of the keys as keys closer to
a LED will be a little brighter than those keys further away.
- 24 -
MAGNIFICATION AND FIELD OF VIEW
1. Magnification
The magnification (power) of the telescope depends on two
characteristics: the focal length of the main telescope and the
focal length of the eyepiece used during a particular
observation. For example, the focal length of the LX200 7” f/15
telescope is fixed at 2670mm; the focal length of the 8” f/10
telescope is fixed at 2000mm; the focal length of the 10” f/10
telescope is fixed at 2500mm; and the focal length of the 12”
f/10 telescope is fixed at 3048mm. To calculate the power in
use with a particular eyepiece, divide the focal length of the
eyepiece into the focal length of the main telescope.
Example: The power obtained with the 8” LX200 with the
SP 26mm eyepiece is:
2000mm
Power = ________ = 77X
26mm
The type of eyepiece (whether MA “Modified Achromatic,” PL
“Plössl,” SP “Super Plössl,” etc.) has no bearing on magnifying
power but does affect such optical characteristics as field of
view, flatness of field and color correction.
The maximum practical magnification is determined by the
nature of the object being observed and, most importantly, by
the prevailing atmospheric conditions. Under very steady
atmospheric “seeing,” the 7” LX200 may be used at powers up
to about 450X on astronomical objects, the 8” LX200 may be
used at powers up to about 500X, the 10” LX200 up to about
600X, and the 12” LX200 up to about 750X. Generally,
however, lower powers of perhaps 250X to 350X will be the
maximum permissible, consistent with high image resolution.
When unsteady air conditions prevail (as witnessed by rapid
“twinkling” of the stars), extremely high-power eyepieces result
in “empty magnification,” where the object detail observed is
actually diminished by the excessive power.
When beginning observations on a particular object, start with
a low power eyepiece; get the object well-centered in the field
of view and sharply focused; then try the next step up in
magnification. If the image starts to become fuzzy as you work
into higher magnifications, then back down to a lower power —
the atmospheric steadiness is not sufficient to support high
powers at the time you are observing. Keep in mind that a
bright, clearly resolved but smaller image will show far more
detail than a dimmer, poorly resolved larger image.
Because of certain characteristics of the human eye (in
particular, eye pupil diameter) and because of optical
considerations inherent in the design of a telescope, there
exists minimum practical powers. Generally speaking, the
lowest usable power is approximately 4X per inch of telescope
aperture, or about 28X in the case of the 7” telescope. During
the daytime, when human eye pupil diameter is reduced, the
minimum practical power with the 8” LX200 is increased to
about 60X, to about 75X with the 10” LX200, and to about 90X
with the 12” LX200; powers lower than this level should be
avoided during daytime observations. A reasonable
magnification range for daytime terrestrial observations
through the 7” LX200 is from about 70X to 180X, 8” LX200 is
from about 80X to 190X, through the 10” LX200 from about
100X to 200X, and the 12” LX200 from 120X to 240X. It should
be noted, however, that the higher magnifications may not be
used due to atmospheric distortion caused by heat, moisture,
and particulate matter suspended in the air.
Accessories are available both to increase and decrease the
operating eyepiece power of the telescope. See your Meade
dealer and the latest Meade Catalog for information on
accessories.
2. Apparent Field and Actual Field
Two terms that are often confused and misunderstood are
“Apparent Field” and “Actual Field.” “Apparent Field” is a
function of the eyepiece design and is built into the eyepiece.
While not totally accurate (but a very good approximation),
“Apparent Field” is usually thought of as the angle your eye
sees when looking through an eyepiece. “Actual Field” is the
amount of the sky that you actually see and is a function of the
eyepiece being used and the telescope.
The “Actual Field” of a telescope with a given eyepiece is
calculated by dividing the “Apparent Field” of the eyepiece by
the power obtained using that eyepiece.
The table below lists the most common eyepieces available
and the “Apparent Field” for each. The power and “Actual Field”
of view that each eyepiece yields is listed for each basic
telescope optical design.
Eyepiece/Apparent Field
7” f/15
Power/Actual Field
8” f/6.3
Power/Actual Field
10” f/6.3
Power/Actual Field
8” f/10
Power/Actual Field
10” f/10
Power/Actual Field
12” f/10
Power/Actual Field
Super Plössl Eyepieces
6.4mm/52°
9.7mm/52°
12.4mm/52°
15mm/52°
20mm/52°
26mm/52°
32mm/52°
40mm/44°
56mm/52° (2" O.D.)
(5-elements;
417/0.12°
275/0.19°
215/0.24°
178/0.29°
134/0.39°
103/0.50°
83/0.63°
67/0.66°
48/1.08°
1.25” O.D., except as noted)
200/0.26°
250/0.21°
132/0.39°
165/0.32°
103/0.50°
129/0.40°
85/0.61°
107/0.49°
64/0.81°
80/0.65°
49/1.06°
62/0.84°
40/1.30°
50/1.04°
32/1.69°
40/1.35°
23/2.27°
29/1.82°
313/0.17°
206/0.25°
161/0.32°
133/0.39°
100/0.52°
77/0.68°
63/0.83°
50/0.88°
36/1.46°
391/0.13°
258/0.20°
202/0.26°
167/0.31°
125/0.42°
96/0.54°
78/0.67°
63/0.70°
45/1.16°
476/0.11°
314/0.17°
246/0.21°
203/0.26°
152/0.34°
117/0.44°
95/0.55°
76/0.53°
54/1.04°
Super Wide Angle Eyepieces (6-elements; 1.25” O.D., except as noted)
13.8mm/67°
193/0.35°
93/0.72°
116/0.58°
145/0.46°
18mm/67°
148/0.45°
71/0.94°
89/0.75°
111/0.60°
24.5mm/67°
109/0.61°
52/1.28°
65/103°
82/0.82°
32mm/67° (2" O.D.)
83/0.81°
40/1.67°
50/1.34°
63/1.07°
40mm/67° (2" O.D.)
67/1.00°
32/2.09°
40/1.67°
50/1.34°
181/0.37°
139/0.48°
102/0.66°
78/0.86°
63/1.07°
221/0.30°
169/0.40°
124/0.54°
95/0.71°
76/0.88°
Ultra Wide Angle Eyepieces (8-elements; 1.25” O.D., except as noted)
4.7mm/84°
568/0.15°
272/0.31°
340/0.25°
426/0.20°
6.7mm/84°
399/0.21°
191/0.44°
239/0.35°
299/0.28°
8.8mm/84° (1.25” - 2” O.D.) 303/0.28°
145/0.58°
182/0.46°
227/0.37°
14mm/84° (1.25” - 2” O.D.) 199/0.44°
91/0.92°
114/0.73°
143/0.59°
532/0.16°
373/0.23°
284/0.30°
179/0.47°
649/0.13°
455/0.18°
346/0.24°
218/0.39°
- 25 -
APPENDIX A: EQUATORIAL WEDGE
There are two equatorial wedges used on Meade LX200
telescopes. Please read the section, below, that applies to your
telescope.
Wedge Body
Tripod Head
1. 8" Equatorial Wedge (For 7" and 8" LX200)
The equatorial wedge permits use of the 8" LX200 telescope in
an astronomical, or “equatorial,” mode. The wedge fits onto the
field tripod, described below, and accepts the base of the 7" or
8" LX200 fork mount (Fig. 8).
NOTE: The Meade equatorial wedge is designed solely for use
in conjunction with the Meade field tripod. The wedge should
never be used without the field tripod (e.g., by placing the
wedge alone on a table top and then mounting the telescope
on the wedge). The 7" or 8" LX200, placed onto the equatorial
wedge alone without the field tripod attached to the wedge may
become seriously imbalanced, to the point where the telescope
may actually tip over.
Fig. 9: Azimuth Control.
a.
1
5
4
2
6
7
3
Fig. 8: Equatorial Wedge for 7” and 8” LX200 Telescope.
(1) Tilt Plate; (2) Attachment Knob; (3) Latitude Scale;
(4) Wedge Body; (5) Tilt Angle Adjustment Knob; (6) Fine
Latitude Adjustment Mechanism; (7) Bubble Level.
The equatorial wedge for the 7" and 8" LX200 telescope is of
modern design, with several important features incorporated to
simplify and facilitate telescope operation. After using the
wedge, you will find that the functional design features included
are of very significant value in routine telescope operations.
Features included are:
•
Attachment of the wedge to the field tripod by means of
only one manual knob.
•
Quick azimuth adjustment by loosening the manual knob
as described above.
•
Bubble level for rapid tripod/wedge leveling.
•
Etched latitude scale for fast adjustment of the latitude
angle.
To assemble the equatorial wedge, follow this procedure (note
that all required wedge hardware and manual knobs are
shipped within the wedge carton):
a.
b.
The wedge consists of two basic parts: the tilt plate and
wedge body (1 and 4, Fig. 8). Attach the tilt-plate to the
wedge body by threading in the four knobs provided. Two
knobs, with washers, should be used on each side of the
wedge body so that a total of 4 knobs attach the tilt plate
to the wedge body.
Place the wedge onto the field tripod with the central
threaded rod of the tripod fitting through the center hole in
the floor of the wedge. Thread the 2-1/2" diameter manual
knob onto the threaded rod of the tripod and firmly tighten
the manual knob.
Azimuth Control
The azimuth control(Fig. 9) for the Meade equatorial wedge
and field tripod is shipped in a plastic bag and includes the
following parts:
•
•
•
•
•
Azimuth base (large U shaped piece of aluminum)
Azimuth arm (small T shaped piece of aluminum)
2 - Azimuth knobs
2 - 8-32 x 1/2" flat-head machine screws
2 - 8-32 x 1" round-head machine screws
To attach the azimuth control to your wedge and tripod, follow
these steps:
1.
Remove the 4 set screws from the wedge and field tripod
(which plug the attachment holes) using a screwdriver.
2.
Attach the azimuth arm to the equatorial wedge using the
2 ea. 8-32 x 1/2" flat-head machine screws.
3.
Attach the azimuth base to the field tripod using the 2 ea.
8-32 x 1" round-head machine screws.
4.
Thread the two azimuth adjustment knobs into the
azimuth base, until they just touch the azimuth arm.
The azimuth control is now ready to use. To adjust in azimuth,
loosen the 3" central wedge knob. Rotate the wedge by using
the two azimuth knobs in a push-pull manner. After positioning
the wedge, tighten the central wedge knob.
b.
Deluxe Latitude Adjuster
The deluxe latitude adjuster (DLA) attaches directly to the
equatorial wedge and permits very precise adjustments in
latitude angle by the simple turning of one knob.
The equatorial wedge for Meade 7" or 8" Schmidt-Cassegrain
telescope is shipped with the main crossbar of the DLA already
installed. Loosen the two socket-head screws that lock the
main crossbar in place, to allow the crossbar to rotate slightly if
needed. Thread the long adjustment knob (3, Fig. 14) into the
main crossbar and position the end of the adjustment knob into
the cavity on the underside of the equatorial wedge tilt-plate.
Tighten the two socket-head screws locking the main crossbar
into place.
The DLA is now ready to use. To make fine latitude
adjustments, follow this procedure:
1.
Slightly loosen the knobs (5, Fig. 8), on each side of the
wedge.
2.
Turn the DLA’s adjustment knob (pressing against the
bottom of the tilt-plate), so that the tilt-plate moves in
latitude angle.
3.
Re-tighten the two knobs, which were loosened in step 1,
above.
NOTE: When installing the tilt-plate to the wedge, note that it is
a tight fit and the sides must generally spread slightly to accept
- 26 the tilt-plate. If the main crossbar of the DLA is already
tightened into place this will inhibit your installation of the tiltplate. You will therefore see that by releasing the screws on the
ends of the DLA crossbar your installation of the wedge tiltplate will be facilitated.
c.
Holding the threaded rod in position, place the
Superwedge on top of the tripod head so that the threaded
stud extending from the tripod head passes through the
center hole on the wedge floor. Make sure the pin
extending from the bottom of the azimuth thrust bar is
positioned in the slot on the tangent arm (see Fig. 11a.,
above).
The Superwedge permits use of the 10" and 12" LX200
telescope in an astronomical, or “equatorial,” mode. The wedge
fits onto the field tripod, described below, and accepts the base
of the 10" and 12" LX200 fork mount (Fig. 10).
d.
Install the large hand knob/compass onto the threaded
stud. Pass the three 5\16-18 X 1-1/4" button head screws
through the clearance slots on the wedge floor and thread
them into the tripod head.
NOTE: The Meade Superwedge is designed solely for use in
conjunction with the Meade field tripod. The Superwedge
should never be used without the field tripod (e.g., by placing
the Superwedge alone on a table top and then mounting the
telescope on the wedge). The 10" and 12" LX200, placed onto
the Superwedge alone without the field tripod attached to the
wedge may become seriously imbalanced, to the point where
the telescope may actually tip over.
e.
The lower tilt plate locking screws (3, Fig. 11) are installed
in the factory to allow the tilt plate to be adjusted for any
latitude greater than 25 degrees and less than 55
degrees. If viewing in a region with a latitude greater than
55 degrees, move the locking bolts to the lower mounting
holes (4, Fig. 11).
2. SUPERWEDGE (For 10" and 12"LX200)
1
4
3
2
5
4
Meade
8
7
6
1
3
2
9
Fig. 10: Superwedge for 10” LX200 Telescope. (1) Tilt Plate;
(2) Attachment Screw; (3) Latitude Scale; (4) Wedge Body;
(5) Tilt Angle Adjustment Screw; (6) Vernier Pointer;
(7) Bubble Level; (8) Fine Latitude Control Knob; (9) Azimuth
Control Knob.
The Superwedge for the 10" and 12" LX200 telescope is of
modern design, with several important features incorporated to
simplify and facilitate telescope operation. After using the
Superwedge for your telescope, you will find that the functional
design features included are of very significant value in routine
telescope operations. Some of these features include:
•
Attachment of the Superwedge to the field tripod by
means of only one manual knob. (For photographic
applications with the telescope where extreme steadiness
is required, 3 additional hex-head screws are provided).
•
Quick azimuth adjustment by loosening the manual knob
as described above.
•
Bubble level for rapid tripod/wedge leveling.
•
Etched latitude scale for fast adjustment of the latitude
angle.
•
Built-in latitude adjustment control.
Fig. 11: Mounting Superwedge. (1) Azimuth Thrust Bar Pin;
(2) Tangent Arm; (3) Lower Tilt Plate Locking Screws;
(4) Lower Mounting Holes.
3. Mounting the Telescope On the Wedge
With 7" or 8" LX200 telescopes, three knobs are supplied for
mounting the telescope’s drive base to the tilt-plate of the
equatorial wedge. With the 10" and 12" LX200, three socket
screws are provided for this purpose.
1
2
3
4
5
To assemble the Superwedge, follow this procedure (note that
all required wedge hardware and manual knobs are shipped
within the wedge carton):
a.
b.
Locate the two 8-32 nylon set screws on the rim of the
tripod head and remove them. Attach the tangent arm to
the tripod using the supplied 8-32 X 1/2" socket cap
screws. (See Fig. 11a., below.)
Push the field tripod threaded rod up so that the threaded
rod extends above the top of the tripod head.
Fig. 12: Mounting to the Equatorial Wedge. (1) Drive Base
Attachment Knob; (2) Telescope Drive Base; (3) Slot for
Attachment Knob; (4) Additional Attachment Knob Holes;
(5) Attachment Knob/Compass.
- 27 -
1
4. Magnetic Compass
2
The magnetic compass helps the observer to set-up the
telescope without actually seeing the pole star Polaris. This
allows setting up before dark or in locations where the view of
Polaris is obstructed. The magnetic compass has an
adjustment to compensate for the local angle of Magnetic
Declination. Note: Magnetic Declination is the difference
between Magnetic North (which the compass shows) and true
north (where the telescope should be pointed). Magnetic
Declination should not be confused with the astronomical term
“Declination,” which, when used with “Right Ascension”,
describes the celestial coordinate system.
a.
1
Setting Magnetic Declination
In order to obtain an accurate reading using the compass, you
must first adjust for the Magnetic Declination for your location.
1
Fig. 13: Underside of Drive Base. (1) Wedge Attachment
Holes; (2) Azimuth Attachment Hole (1/2-13 thread).
1.
First, determine the Magnetic Declination in your area
using the Isogonic Chart (Fig. 15)
2.
Squeeze the clear central vial with thumb and index finger
of the left hand.
3.
With the right hand, rotate the outer dial until the orienting
arrow (the black arrow painted on the inside clear surface)
is lined up with the desired Magnetic Declination angle on
the declination scale. Notice that East Magnetic
Declination is to the right of the “North” position and West
Magnetic Declination is left. As an example, Fig. 16 shows
the correct setting for 16 degrees West Declination, which
covers Providence, Rhode Island.
4
2
1
20°
25°
30°
1
E — Declination — W
40°
50°
60°
50°
6
6
40°
3
30°
5
Fig. 14: Telescope on Wedge. (1) Tilt Plate Attachment
Knobs; (2) Telescope to Tilt Plate Attachment Knobs; (3)
Deluxe Latitude Control (DLC) Knob; (4) Altazimuth
Attachment Hole; (5) DLC Main Crossbar; (6) DLC Crossbar
Attachment Screws.
Thread one of these knobs (or screws, as appropriate) partially
into the hole on the underside of the drive base, located at the
curved-end of the drive base (4, Fig. 12). This knob or screw
should be threaded in about 3 full turns, not fully threaded into
the hole.
18°
17°
16°
15°
14°
13°
12°
11°
Check that the knobs or bolts at the side of the wedge (5, Fig. 8
or 5, Fig. 10), are firmly tightened before placing the telescope
onto the wedge.
Grasping the 2 fork arms of the telescope firmly, with the power
panel towards you, place the telescope onto the tilt plate of the
wedge by sliding the knob (7" and 8" LX200) or screw (10" and
12" LX200) into the slot at the top of the curved-end of the
wedge tilt-plate.
Insert the 2 remaining knobs for the 7" and 8" LX200, or socket
screws for the 10" and 12" LX200, through the underside of the
tilt plate and into the underside of the drive base. Tighten down
all 3 knobs or screws to a firm feel. Extreme force is not
necessary in this regard.
The telescope is now fully mounted onto the wedge and field
tripod. Adjustments in wedge latitude angle and/or azimuth
orientation may be made with the telescope in place. Further
details on telescope polar alignment see APPENDIX B, page 30.
25°
24°
22°
21°
20°
19°
10°
9°
8°
7°
6°
3°
5° 4°
2°
1°
23°
22°
21°
20°
19°
18°
17°
16°
15°
14°
13°
12°
11°
10°
9°
8°
7°
6°
5°
4°
3°
2°
1°
0°
Fig. 15: Magnetic Declination Map.
b.
Compass Installation
The Magnetic Compass is now set for the correct declination
angle. To attach to the equatorial wedge, follow these steps:
1.
Snap the Magnetic Compass into the 3" diameter wedge
attachment knob (after setting the Magnetic Declination as
described above). Position the compass into the knob so
that the 360 degree location on the direction scale (the
“North” position) lines up with one of the nine points of the
knobs. (See Fig. 16.) Press the compass firmly into the
knob.
2.
Assemble the equatorial wedge onto the field tripod as
described in the Instruction Manual using the
knob/compass combination to attach the wedge to the
tripod.
- 28 2.
Point of knob and
“North” line up
16° West
Declination
Magnetic
Pointing
Arrow
N
E
W
W
Rotate the knob/compass so that the magnetic pointing
arrow lies directly over the painted black alignment arrow
(painted on the bottom surface of the compass, Fig. 18).
The “North” position on the direction scale (and the point
on the knob/compass) now point directly north.
Magnetic
North
Centerline of wedge
E
True
North
W
W
N
S
E
S
Orienting Arrow
E
Fig. 16: Magnetic Compass.
c.
Finding True North
The Magnetic Compass is now ready to use. Just follow these
simple steps for a quick and easy azimuth alignment:
1.
Loosen the knob/compass slightly. This allows for rotation
of the equatorial wedge under the knob/compass
(Fig. 17). The magnetic pointing arrow will point to
magnetic north.
Magnetic
North
Centerline of wedge
Fig. 18: Equatorial Wedge.
3.
N
W
E
Rotate the equatorial wedge in azimuth (without moving
the knob/compass) until the centerline of the wedge lines
up with the point of the knob/compass (Fig. 19). The
centerline of the equatorial wedge now falls directly on the
true north line.
W
Magnetic
North
E
S
W
W
N
E
S
E
True
North
and
centerline of
wedge
Fig. 17: Equatorial Wedge.
Fig. 19: Equatorial Wedge.
4.
Tighten the knob/compass, locking the equatorial wedge
into place.
The field tripod and equatorial wedge are now pointed directly
toward celestial north, without ever having seen the North Star.
- 29 -
APPENDIX B: EQUATORIAL USE
1. Celestial Coordinates
Celestial objects are mapped according to a coordinate system
on the Celestial Sphere, an imaginary sphere surrounding
Earth on which all stars appear to be placed. This celestial
object mapping system is analogous to the Earth-based
coordinate system of latitude and longitude.
The poles of the celestial coordinate system are defined as
those two points where the Earth’s rotational axis, if extended
to infinity, north and south, intersect the celestial sphere. Thus,
the North Celestial Pole (1, Fig. 20) is that point in the sky
where an extension of the Earth’s axis through the North Pole
intersects the celestial sphere. This point in the sky is located
near the North Star, Polaris.
In mapping the surface of the Earth, lines of longitude are
drawn between the North and South Poles. Similarly, lines of
latitude are drawn in an east-west direction, parallel to the
Earth’s Equator. The Celestial Equator (2, Fig. 20) is a
projection of the Earth’s Equator onto the celestial sphere.
Just as on the surface of the Earth, in mapping the celestial
sphere, imaginary lines have been drawn to form a coordinate
grid. Thus, object positions on the Earth’s surface are specified
by their latitude and longitude. For example, you could locate
Los Angeles, California, by its latitude (+34°) and longitude
(118°); similarly, you could locate the constellation Ursa Major
(which includes the Big Dipper) by its general position on the
celestial sphere:
R.A.: 11hr; Dec: +50°.
•
•
Right Ascension: The celestial analog to Earth longitude
is called “Right Ascension,” or “R.A.,” and is measured in
time on the 24 hour “clock” and shown in hours (“hr”),
minutes (“min”) and seconds (“sec”) from an arbitrarily
defined “zero” line of Right Ascension passing through the
constellation Pegasus. Right Ascension coordinates range
from 0hr 0min 0sec to 23hr 59min 59sec. Thus there are
24 primary lines of R.A., located at 15 degree intervals
along the celestial equator. Objects located further and
further east of the prime Right Ascension grid line (0hr
0min 0sec) carry increasing R.A. coordinates.
Declination: The celestial analog to Earth latitude is called
Declination, or “Dec”, and is measured in degrees,
minutes and seconds (e.g., 15° 27' 33"). Declination
shown as north of the celestial equator is indicated with a
“+” sign in front of the measurement (e.g., the Declination
of the North Celestial Pole is +90°), with Declination south
of the celestial equator indicated with a “–” sign (e.g., the
Declination of the South Celestial Pole is –90°). Any point
on the celestial equator itself (which, for example, passes
through the constellations Orion, Virgo and Aquarius) is
specified as having a Dec of zero, shown as 0° 0' 0".
With all celestial objects therefore capable of being specified in
position by their celestial coordinates of Right Ascension and
Declination, the task of finding objects (in particular, faint
objects) is vastly simplified. The setting circles, R.A (10, Fig. 1)
and Dec. (3, Fig. 1) of the LX200 telescope may be dialed, in
North
Celestial Pole
1
(Vicinity of Polaris)
2
Fig. 20: The Celestial Sphere.
effect, to read the object coordinates and the object found
without resorting to visual location techniques. However, these
setting circles may be used to advantage only if the telescope
is first properly aligned with the North Celestial Pole.
2. Lining Up with the Celestial Pole
Objects in the sky appear to revolve around the celestial pole.
(Actually, celestial objects are essentially “fixed,” and their
apparent motion is caused by the Earth’s axial rotation). During
any 24 hour period, stars make one complete revolution about
the pole, making concentric circles with the pole at the center.
By lining up the telescope’s polar axis with the North Celestial
Pole (or for observers located in Earth’s Southern Hemisphere
with the South Celestial Pole (see MODE FUNCTIONS, page 16)
astronomical objects may be followed, or tracked, simply by
moving the telescope about one axis, the polar axis. In the case
of the Meade LX200 7", 8", 10", and 12" Schmidt-Cassegrain
telescopes, this tracking may be accomplished automatically
with the electric motor drive.
If the telescope is reasonably well aligned with the pole,
therefore, very little use of the telescope’s Declination slow
motion control is necessary—virtually all of the required
telescope tracking will be in Right Ascension. (If the telescope
were perfectly aligned with the pole, no Declination tracking of
stellar objects would be required). For the purposes of casual
visual telescopic observations, lining up the telescope’s polar
axis to within a degree or two of the pole is more than sufficient:
with this level of pointing accuracy, the telescope’s motor drive
will track accurately and keep objects in the telescopic field of
view for perhaps 20 to 30 minutes.
Begin polar aligning the telescope as soon as you can see
Polaris. Finding Polaris is simple. Most people recognize the
“Big Dipper.” The Big Dipper has two stars that point the way to
Polaris (see Fig. 21). Once Polaris is found, it is a
straightforward procedure to obtain a rough polar alignment.
Little Dipper
Big Dipper
Polaris
Cassiopeia
Fig. 21: Locating Polaris.
To line up the 7", 8", 10" or 12" LX200 with the Pole, follow this
procedure:
a.
Using the bubble level located on the floor of the wedge,
adjust the tripod legs so that the telescope/ wedge/tripod
system reads “level.”
b.
Set the equatorial wedge to your observing latitude as
described in Appendix A.
c.
Loosen the Dec. lock, and rotate the telescope tube in
Declination so that the telescope’s Declination reads 90°.
Tighten the Dec. lock. Loosen the R.A. lock, and rotate the
Fork Arms to the 00 H.A. position (see MODE FUNCTIONS,
page 16) and initiate the POLAR align sequence on the
keypad.
d.
Using the azimuth and latitude controls on the wedge,
center Polaris in the field of view. Do not use the
telescope’s Declination or Right Ascension controls during
this process.
At this point, your polar alignment is good enough for casual
observations. There are times, however, when you will need to
have precise polar alignment, such as when making fine
astrophotographs or when using the setting circles to find new
objects.
- 30 As an aside procedure, during your first use of the telescope,
you should check the calibration of the Declination setting
circle (3, Fig. 1), located at the top of each side of the fork.
After performing the polar alignment procedure, center the
star Polaris in the telescope field. Remove the knurled
central hub of the Declination setting circle and slightly
loosen the two bolts located under the knob. Now turn the
circle unit until it reads 89.2°, the Declination of Polaris, and
then tighten down the two bolts and replace the knurled
knob. Also realize, should you wish to use the manual setting
circles, that the R.A. setting circle (10, Fig. 1) must be
calibrated on the Right Ascension of a star (see APPENDIX C,
page 31) manually every time the telescope is set up. The
R.A. setting circle has two sets of numbers, the inner set is
for Southern hemisphere use, while the other is for Northern
hemisphere use.
Once the latitude angle of the wedge has been fixed and
locked-in according to the above procedure, it is not necessary
to repeat this operation each time the telescope is used, unless
you move a considerable distance North or South from your
original observing position. (Approximately 70 miles movement
in North-South observing position is equivalent to 1° in latitude
change). The wedge may be detached from the field tripod and,
as long as the latitude angle setting is not altered and the field
tripod is leveled, it will retain the correct latitude setting when
replaced on the tripod.
3. Precise Polar Alignment
should be located within ±30 minutes in R.A. of the
meridian and within ±5° of the celestial equator. (Pointing
the telescope at a star that is straight up, with the
Declination set to 0°, will point the telescope in the right
direction.)
c.
a. If the star drifts South (or down), the telescope’s
polar axis is pointing too far East (Fig. 22).
b. If the star drifts North (or up), the telescope’s polar
axis is pointing too far West (Fig. 23).
d.
Move the wedge in azimuth (horizontally) to effect the
appropriate change in polar alignment. Reposition the
telescope’s East-West polar axis orientation until there is
no further North-South drift by the star. Track the star for
a period of time to be certain that its Declination drift has
ceased. (Please note that Figs. 22, 23, 24, and 25 show
the telescope pointed in the 90 degree position, and not
the 0 degree position that is required for “Drift” method
alignment. This is done to illustrate the position of the pole
star relative to the polar axis of the telescope.)
e.
Next, point the telescope at another moderately bright star
near the Eastern horizon, but still near the celestial
equator. For best results, the star should be about 20° or
30° above the Eastern horizon and within ± 5° of the
celestial equator.
f.
It should be emphasized that precise alignment of the
telescope’s polar axis to the celestial pole for casual visual
observations is not necessary. Don’t allow a time-consuming
effort at lining up with the pole to interfere with your basic
enjoyment of the telescope. For long-exposure photography,
however, the ground rules are quite different, and precise polar
alignment is not only advisable, but almost essential.
Notwithstanding the precision and sophistication of the drive
system supplied with the Meade LX200 telescopes, the fewer
tracking corrections required during the course of a longexposure photograph, the better. (For our purposes, “longexposure” means any photograph of about 10 minutes duration
or longer). In particular, the number of Declination corrections
required is a direct function of the precision of polar alignment.
Note the extent of the star’s drift in Declination (disregard
drift in Right Ascension):
Again note the extent of the star’s drift in Declination:
g.
a.
If the star drifts South, (or down) the telescope’s
polar axis is pointing too low (Fig. 24).
b.
If the star drifts North, (or up) the telescope’s polar
axis is pointing too high (Fig. 25).
Use the latitude angle fine-adjust control on the wedge to
effect the appropriate change in latitude angle, based on
your observations above. Again, track the star for a period
of time to be certain that Declination drift has ceased.
The above procedure results in very accurate polar alignment,
and minimizes the need for tracking corrections during
astrophotography.
Polaris ★
Precise polar alignment requires the use of a crosshair
eyepiece. The Meade Illuminated Reticle Eyepiece is wellsuited in this application, but you will want to increase the
effective magnification through the use of a 2X or 3X Barlow
lens. Then either follow Refined Polar Alignment (page 17) or
follow this procedure, sometimes better known as the “Drift”
method (particularly if the pole star is not visible):
a.
Obtain a rough polar alignment as described earlier. Place
the illuminated reticle eyepiece (or eyepiece/Barlow
combination) into the eyepiece holder of the telescope.
b.
Point the telescope, with the motor drive running, at a
moderately bright star near where the meridian (the NorthSouth line passing through your local zenith) and the
celestial equator intersect. For best results, the star
Polaris ★
Fig. 22: Mount too far East.
Fig. 24: Mount too low.
Polaris ★
★ Polaris
Fig. 23: Mount too far West.
Fig. 25: Mount too high.
- 31 -
APPENDIX C:
LX200 ALIGNMENT STAR LIBRARY
AND STAR CHARTS:
1. Alignment Stars
The LX200 utilizes 33 bright and well known stars to calibrate
the telescope’s Object Library in the ALTAZ and POLAR
alignments. These stars were selected to allow observers from
anywhere in the world on any given night, to be able to easily
and quickly make precision alignments. The LX200 Alignment
Star Library and Star Charts are below for your reference:
LX200 ALIGNMENT STAR LIBRARY
STAR NAME
STAR #
MAGNITUDE
CONSTELL
R/A
DEC.
ACHERNAR
ACRUX A
ALBIREO
ALKAID
ALDEBARAN
ALNILAM
ALPHARD
ALPHEKKA
ALTAIR
ANTARES
ARCTURUS
BETELGUESE
BOGARDUS
CANOPUS
CAPELLA
CASTOR A
DENEB
DENEBOLA
DIPHDA
ENIF
FOMALHAUT
HADAR
HAMAL
MARKAB
MIRA
POLARIS
POLLUX
PROCYON
REGULUS
RIGEL
SIRIUS
SPICA
VEGA
13
121
223
140
33
50
95
165
226
177
147
56
58
63
42
78
232
114
8
238
247
144
17
249
20
19
81
80
100
41
67
138
214
0.5
1.3
3.1
1.9
0.9
1.7
2.0
2.2
0.8
0.9
0.0
0.4
2.6
-0.7
0.1
1.9
1.3
2.1
2.0
2.4
1.2
0.6
2.0
2.5
2.1
2.0
1.1
0.4
1.4
0.1
-1.5
1.0
0.0
ERIDANUS
CRUX
CYGNUS
URSA MAJOR
TAURUS
ORION
HYDRA
CORONA BOR.
AQUILA
SCORPIUS
BOOTES
ORION
AURIGA
CARINA
AURIGA
GEMINI
CYGNUS
LEO
CETUS
PEGASUS
PISCES AUST.
CENTAURUS
ARIES
PEGASUS
CETUS
URSA MINOR
GEMINI
CANIS MINOR
LEO
ORION
CANIS MAJOR
VIRGO
LYRA
01 37.7
12 26.6
19 30.8
13 47.6
04 35.9
05 36.2
09 27.6
15 35.5
19 50.8
16 29.5
14 15.7
05 55.2
05 59.8
06 24.0
05 16.6
07 34.6
20 41.5
11 49.1
00 43.6
21 44.2
22 57.7
14 03.9
02 07.2
23 04.8
02 19.4
02 14.7
07 45.4
07 39.3
10 08.5
05 14.6
06 45.2
13 25.2
18 37.0
-57 14
-63 06
+27 58
+49 19
+16 31
-01 12
-08 39
+26 43
+08 52
-26 26
+19 11
+07 25
+37 13
-52 42
+46 00
+31 53
+45 17
+14 34
-17 59
+09 53
-29 38
-60 24
+23 28
+15 12
-02 58
+89 17
+28 02
+05 14
+11 58
-08 12
-16 43
-11 10
+38 47
- 32 -
2. Star Charts
(for Northern Hemisphere Observers)
Overhead
Overhead
Aldeberan
Aldebaran
Betelgeuse
Rigel
Rigel
Betelgeuse
Sirius
SOUTHEAST
SOUTH
January 7:00 to 9:00
February 7:00 to 9:00
Overhead
Overhead
Alkaid
Betelgeuse
Polaris
Aldebaran
Sirius
Rigel
SOUTHWEST
NORTH
March 7:00 to 9:00
April 7:00 to 9:00
Overhead
Alkaid
Overhead
Alkaid
Polaris
Polaris
NORTH
NORTH
May 7:00 to 9:00
June 7:00 to 9:00
- 33 -
Overhead
Overhead
Vega
Vega
Alkaid
Deneb
Deneb
Alkaid
Polaris
Polaris
NORTH
NORTH
July 7:00 to 9:00
August 7:00 to 9:00
Overhead
Vega
Overhead
Deneb
Deneb
Vega
Polaris
Alkaid
Polaris
NORTH
NORTH
September 7:00 to 9:00
October 7:00 to 9:00
Overhead
Altair
Overhead
Deneb
Aldebaran
Vega
Polaris
Betelgeuse
Rigel
NORTHWEST
SOUTHEAST
November 7:00 to 9:00
December 7:00 to 9:00
- 34 -
APPENDIX D:
LX200 64,359-OBJECT LIBRARY
1. The LX200 64,359-Object Library
The following guide to VQs was used in the visual observation
process:
SUPER
Very bright object with very interesting
shape or structure.
The LX200 64,359-Object Library is a collection of the most
studied and fantastic objects in the sky. It includes:
•
15,928 SAO (Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory)
Catalog of Stars: All stars brighter than 7th magnitude.
•
12,921 UGC (Uppsala General Catalog) Galaxies:
Complete catalog.
•
7,840 NGC (New General Catalog) objects: Complete
Catalog.
•
5,386 IC (Index Catalog) objects: Complete catalog.
•
21,815 GCVS (General Catalog of Variable Stars) objects:
Complete catalog.
•
351 Alignment Stars: LX200 alignment stars.
•
110 M (Messier) objects: Complete catalog.
•
8 major planets from Mercury to Pluto.
This appendix has three object listings in sections 2, 3, and 4.
Section 2 (page 36) is a partial list of 278 of the best NGC
objects. These are most of the best objects in the sky, and as
such, make good first targets. Section 3 (page 43) is a list of the
250 brightest stars and 100 double stars. The complete
Messier list is shown in Section 4 (page 49).
The above databases are accessed through the M, STAR, and
CNGC keys. The M key accesses the M object database only;
the STAR key the SAO, STAR, GCVS, and planet databases;
and the CNGC key the UGC, NGC, and IC databases.
When the STAR or CNGC key is pressed, the display will show
which database is currently active. At this point you can enter
the object number for that database, or hit ENTER to bring up
the menu to change databases. The LX200 will remember
which database was last used.
a. SAO Catalog
The standard Star catalog used in astronomy, this catalog
includes all stars brighter than 7th magnitude.
b. UGC Catalog
This catalog of galaxies includes objects as faint as 15th
magnitude.
c. CNGC Catalog
The CNGC is enhanced from the RNGC in many ways.
Angular sizes are given in arc-seconds on the CNGC listing,
and in a convenient scaled format on the LX200 display.
Magnitudes are given to 0.1 magnitude where possible.
The coordinates in the CNGC listing are listed for the year
2000. The LX200 calculates object positions upon power up to
the current date (as shown on the time/date display). This
makes the LX200 pointing more accurate.
Objects have been assigned a “Visual Quality Rating” (VQ). A
large number of VQs have been obtained by observing the
objects. To make the VQs as useful as possible, all
observations have been made with the same telescope and
eyepiece under substantially identical observing conditions.
Only for very small objects was a higher power eyepiece used.
Your “Visual Quality Rating” of a particular object will vary,
largely due to sky conditions.
If the object has been rated by observation, an upper-case
character (ABCDEFG) is used for the VQ on the CNGC listing.
If the object has not been observed, the VQ has been
estimated by a computer program from the object type, size,
and brightness and the VQ is specified in lower-case
characters (abcdefg). The VQs for visually-rated objects are a
considerably more consistent guide to observability and
appearance than either the computed VQs or an examination
of the type, magnitude, and size data.
EXCEL
Bright object with very interesting shape or
structure.
OR
Very bright object with moderately
interesting shape or structure.
V GOOD
Bright object with moderately interesting
shape or structure.
OR
Very bright object with little or no
interesting shape or structure.
GOOD
Easy to see without averted vision with
some interesting shape or structure.
OR
Bright object, but little or no interesting
shape or structure.
FAIR
Easy to see without averted vision, but little
or no interesting shape or structure.
POOR
Easy to see with averted vision. Often
borderline visible without averted vision.
V POOR
A struggle to see with careful use of
averted vision.
(none)
Not yet rated AND missing information for
computer estimate.
OR
Could not see despite careful use of
averted vision.
All, or very nearly all, of the objects in the CNGC are visible with
standard instrumentation and observing conditions used to
obtain the visual quality ratings. It is a good indication of what
to expect with similar equipment by experienced deep-sky
observers in excellent conditions. Naturally smaller telescopes
and/or less optimal observing conditions will lower the apparent
quality of all objects.
The following is a description of the format of the optional
CNGC listing for each object:
COLUMN
NAME
DESCRIPTION
1
CNGC #
CNGC 0001 - CNGC 7840
2
RA
Right Ascension
3
DEC
Declination
4
SIZE
Size of object (arc-seconds)
5
MAG
Magnitude (-5.5 through 19.9)
6
TYPE
Type of object
7
*
* object is not in the RNGC
8
ALT CAT
Alternate catalog name & number
9
VQ
Visual Quality Rating
(abcdefg ) or (ABCDEFG)
10
TAGS
Object Type # (0-F):
S = Sky-Cat : T = Tirion
11
COMMENTS
Name, comments, other info
- 35 The following types are distinguished in the CNGC:
TYPE
LEGEND
DESCRIPTION
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
S
T
None
OPEN
GLOB
DNEB
PNEB
GAL
OPEN + DNEB
None
STAR
MULTI+STAR
MULTI+GAL
DNEB
GAL+OPEN
GAL+GLOB
GAL+DNEB
GAL+OPEN+DNEB
Unverified Southern Object
Open Cluster
Globular Cluster
Diffuse Nebula
Planetary Nebula (or SN Remnant)
Galaxy
Open Cluster + Diffuse Nebula
Non-Existent Object
Star
Multiple Star
Multiple Galaxy (Usually Interacting)
Dark Nebula in front of Diffuse Nebula
Open Cluster in External Galaxy
Globular Cluster in External Galaxy
Diffuse Nebula in External Galaxy
Open Cluster + Diffuse Nebula in Galaxy
Object is also listed in the Sky Catalogue 2000
Object is also listed in the Tirion Sky Atlas 2000
d. IC Catalog
g. M (Messier) Catalog
This is the complete IC catalog of a variety of objects that the
standard NGC catalog missed.
The M catalog has been the benchmark deep-sky catalog for
years. Recently expanded to 110 objects, the M (Messier)
catalog contains most of the best deep-sky objects.
e. GCVS Catalog
This is a complete catalog of variable stars (shown at the
bottom of this page).
Variable stars from the GCVS are entered using a six digit
number. The first two digits, refer to the constellation where the
variable star is located and is listed in the table below.
The next four digits are assigned sequentially within each
constellation according to the standard sequence of variablestar designations (R, S, ...).
h. Planet Catalog
The LX200 calculates the orbital positions of the eight major
planets for the current calendar date. To access a planet, use
the STAR key and enter the appropriate number as indicated
below: (NOTE: 903 is the Moon.)
OBJECT LIBRARY PLANET LEGEND
STAR #
PLANET
STAR#
Therefore, the first star in the constellation of Virgo would be
entered as: 860001.
MERCURY
901
SATURN
906
VENUS
902
URANUS
907
f.
MARS
904
NEPTUNE
908
JUPITER
905
PLUTO
909
Star Catalog
The STAR catalog contains the 250 brightest stars (STAR 1
through STAR 250), 100 interesting double stars (STAR 251
through STAR 350), plus Sigma Octantis, the southern pole
star (STAR 351).
PLANET
Code
Const
Code
Const
Code
Const
Code
Const
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
AND
ANT
APS
AQR
AQL
ARA
ARI
AUR
BOO
CAE
CAM
CNC
CVN
CMA
CMI
CAP
CAR
CAS
CEN
CEP
CET
CHA
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
CIR
COL
COM
CRA
CRB
CRV
CRT
CRU
CYG
DEL
DOR
DRA
EQU
ERI
FOR
GEM
GRU
HER
HOR
HYA
HYI
IND
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
LAC
LEO
LMI
LEP
LIB
LUP
LYN
LYR
MEN
MIC
MON
MUS
NOR
OCT
OPH
ORI
PAV
PEG
PER
PHE
PIC
PSC
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
PSA
PUP
PYX
RET
SGE
SGR
SCO
SCL
SCT
SER
SEX
TAU
TEL
TRI
TRA
TUC
UMA
UMI
VEL
VIR
VOL
VUL
- 36 -
2. CNGC Catalog
CNGC#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
GALAXY S- IV-V
GALAXY SBm: PEC EMISSION
GLOB CLUS sp=G3
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY S(B)b+
UGC A4
c 5 ST
b 5 ST
B 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 5 ST
8.1x5.8
32.4x6.5
47 Tuc 16kly
c 1 ST
C 5 ST
C 5 ST
B 5 ST
c 1 ST
Oldest Open Cluster 5kly
M110 Comp of M31 17.4x9.8
M32 Comp of M31 7.6x5.8
M31 Andromeda Gal 178x63
b 5 ST
C 5 ST
b 2 ST
b 5 ST
b 2 ST
20.0x7.4
25.1x7.4
0045
0055
0104
0129
0134
00
00
00
00
00
14.0
15.1
24.1
29.9
30.4
-23
-39
-72
+60
-33
10
13
04
14
15
486
1944
1854
1260
486
10.4
8.2
4.0v
6.5v
10.1
0188
0205
0221
0224
0225
00
00
00
00
00
44.3
40.4
42.8
42.8
43.5
+85
+41
+40
+41
+61
21
42
53
17
48
840
1044
456
10680
720
8.1v
8.0
8.2
3.5
7.0
OPEN CLUS sp=F2
GALAXY E6:
GALAXY E2
GALAXY Sb I-II
OPEN CLUS
0247
0253
0288
0300
0362
00
00
00
00
01
47.1
47.5
52.6
55.0
02.4
-20
-25
-26
-37
-70
44
17
36
42
51
1200
1506
828
1200
774
8.9
7.1
8.1v
8.7
6.6v
GALAXY S- IV
GALAXY Scp
GLOB CLUS
GALAXY Sd III-IV
GLOB CLUS
UGC A11
UGC A13
0370
0411
0458
0581
0598
01
01
01
01
01
04.8
07.9
14.9
33.3
33.9
+02
-71
-71
+60
+30
07
46
32
43
40
720
750
750
360
3720
9.3
11.0
10.5
7.4v
5.7
GALAXY Ir+ V
GLOB CLUS IN SMC
GLOB CLUS IN SMC
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY Sc II-III
* IC 1613
0628
0650
0651
0654
0660
01
01
01
01
01
36.7
42.0
42.0
43.9
43.0
+15
+51
+51
+61
+13
47
34
34
53
38
612
290
290
300
546
9.2
12.2
12.2
6.5v
10.8
GALAXY Sc I
PLAN NEB PART OF 0651
PLAN NEB PART OF 0650
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY SBap
0744
0752
0869
0884
0925
01
01
02
02
02
58.6
57.8
19.1
22.5
27.3
+55
+37
+57
+57
+33
29
41
09
07
35
660
3000
1800
1800
588
7.9v
5.7v
4.3p
4.4p
10.0
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS sp=A5
OPEN CLUS sp=B1
OPEN CLUS sp=B0
GALAXY S(B)c II-III
0956
0957
1023
1025
1027
02
02
02
02
02
32.4
33.6
40.5
39.9
42.7
+44
+57
+39
-34
+61
38
31
04
32
33
480
660
522
1200
1200
8.9p
7.6v
9.5
9.0p
6.7v
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY E7p
GALAXY dE3
OPEN CLUS
1039
1068
1097
1112
1232
02
02
02
02
03
42.0
42.7
46.5
51.2
09.7
+42
-00
-30
+60
-20
47
01
16
27
34
2100
414
558
720
468
5.2v
8.8
9.3
6.5v
9.9
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY Sbp SEYFERT
GALAXY S(B)b I-II 2-SYS
OPEN CLUS + DNEB IV 3 p n
GALAXY Sc I 2-SYS
1245
1261
1291
1313
1316
03
03
03
03
03
14.6
12.3
17.3
10.0
22.6
+47
-55
-41
-66
-37
14
14
05
41
14
600
414
630
510
426
8.4v
8.4v
8.5
9.4
8.9
1342
1360
1365
1432
1444
03
03
03
03
03
31.6
33.4
33.7
46.0
49.4
+37
-25
-36
+24
+52
20
51
08
09
39
840
390
588
6600
240
1454
1457
1502
1513
1528
03
03
04
04
04
46.7
47.1
07.4
10.1
15.4
+68
+24
+62
+49
+51
07
07
19
31
15
1545
1582
1647
1662
1664
04
04
04
04
04
20.9
32.2
46.2
48.5
51.0
+50
+43
+19
+10
+43
15
52
05
56
42
47 Tuc
UGC 426
UGC 452
UGC 454
CNGC 0581
UGC 1117
UGC 1149
CNGC 0650
c5S
cD
cD
D 1 ST
C 5 ST
UGC 1201
D 5 ST
C 4 ST
C 4 ST
c 1 ST
c5S
UGC 1913
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
A 1 ST
A 1 ST
c 5 ST
UGC 2154
*
20.0x14.8
12.0x11.2
M103
M33 Triangulum Gal 62x39
M74 10.2x9.5
M76 Little Dumbbell Nebula
Little Dumbbell Nebula
9.1x4.1
1200ly
Double Cluster h Per 7kly
Double Cluster x Per 8kly
9.8x6.0
8.7x3.3
20.0x13.8
C 1 ST
D 5 ST
c A ST
c 6 ST
C A ST
7.8x6.9 2-SYS +SBm
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GALAXY SBa
GALAXY SBd
GALAXY S(B)0p 3-SYS
c 1 ST
c 2 ST
b 5 ST
c 5 ST
c A ST
10.5x9.1
8.5x6.6
7.1x5.5 3-SYS
6.7v
9.0p
9.5
3.4
6.6v
OPEN CLUS
PLAN NEB
GALAXY SBb I-II
OPEN CLUS + RNEB
OPEN CLUS
c
c
c
c
c
1068
7200
480
540
1440
9.1
1.6
5.7v
8.4v
6.4v
GALAXY S(B)c I-II
OPEN CLUS + RNEB sp=B6
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
1080
2220
2700
1200
1080
6.2v
7.0p
6.4v
6.4v
7.6v
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS
CNGC 1039
UGC 2188
UGC A41
* IC 1848
c1S
c 1 ST
C 5 ST
b5S
c 1 ST
8.1x2.6
* IC 342
* CNGC 1457
1
4
5
6
1
ST
ST
S
S
ST
b 5 ST
c 6 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
c
c
c
c
c
1
1
1
1
1
ST
S
ST
S
ST
M34
M77 6.9x5.9 Seyfert Galaxy
9.3x6.6 2-SYS + E5
9.8x5.5
Pleiades M45 Blue Nebula
17.8x17.4 UGC 2847
M45 Pleiades 410ly
- 37 -
CNGC Catalog (continued)
CNGC#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
1746
1763
1807
1817
1820
05
04
05
05
05
03.6
56.8
10.7
12.1
03.8
+23
-66
+16
+16
-67
49
24
32
42
17
2520
1500
1020
960
410
6.1p
8.3
7.0v
7.7v
9.0
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLUS
CLUS + ENEB IN LMC
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS IN LMC
1851
1857
1893
1904
1912
05
05
05
05
05
14.0
20.1
22.7
24.2
28.7
-40
+39
+33
-24
+35
02
21
24
31
51
660
360
660
522
1260
7.3v
7.0v
7.5v
8.0v
6.4v
GLOB CLUS sp=F7
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS + ENEB HII
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS sp=B5
1952
1960
1966
1975
1976
05
05
05
05
05
34.5
36.2
26.5
35.4
35.3
+22
+34
-68
-04
-05
01
08
47
41
23
360
720
780
600
3960
8.4
6.0v
8.5
8.8
3.9
PLAN NEB EMIS SN REM
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS + DNEB IN LMC
DIFF RNEB
DIFF RNEB + ENEB
1980
1981
1982
1999
2024
05
05
05
05
05
35.2
35.3
35.5
36.5
42.0
-05
-04
-05
-06
-01
55
26
16
43
50
840
1500
1200
960
1800
2.5
4.6v
5.8
9.5
8.8
OPEN CLUS + ENEB sp=O5
OPEN CLUS
DIFF RNEB + ENEB
DIFF RNEB
DIFF ENEB HII
2068
2070
2074
2099
2129
05
05
05
05
06
46.8
38.5
39.0
52.4
01.1
+00
-69
-69
+32
+23
03
05
30
33
18
480
300
960
1440
420
11.3
8.3v
8.5
5.6v
6.7v
DIFF RNEB
OPEN CLUS + ENEB IN LMC
OPEN CLUS + ENEB IN LMC
OPEN CLUS sp=B8
OPEN CLUS
CNGC 2068
2168
2169
2175
2194
2204
06
06
06
06
06
08.9
08.4
09.8
13.8
15.7
+24
+13
+20
+12
-18
21
58
19
49
39
1680
420
1080
600
780
5.1v
5.9v
6.8v
8.5v
8.6v
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLUS sp=B5
CLUS
CLUS + ENEB
CLUS
CLUS
CNGC 2168
2215
2232
2237
2244
2250
06
06
06
06
06
20.8
26.8
30.3
32.3
32.8
-07
-04
+05
+04
-05
17
44
03
52
02
660
1800
4800
1440
480
8.4v
3.9v
7.4
4.8v
8.9p
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
2251
2252
2264
2281
2286
06
06
06
06
06
34.8
35.0
41.2
49.4
47.7
+08
+05
+09
+41
-03
22
23
53
04
10
600
1200
1200
900
900
7.3v
7.7p
3.9v
5.4v
7.5v
2287
2301
2323
2324
2331
06
06
07
07
07
47.1
51.8
02.9
04.2
07.3
-20
+00
-08
+01
+27
45
28
20
04
21
2280
720
960
480
1080
2335
2343
2345
2353
2354
07
07
07
07
07
06.6
08.3
08.4
14.7
14.2
-10
-10
-13
-10
-25
05
40
10
17
43
2360
2362
2374
2395
2396
07
07
07
07
07
17.7
18.7
24.1
27.1
28.2
-15
-24
-13
+13
-11
2403
2420
2421
2422
2423
07
07
07
07
07
36.9
38.4
36.3
36.6
37.2
+65
+21
-20
-14
-13
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
c 1 ST
BFS
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
cC
CNGC 1904
CNGC 1912
CNGC 1952
CNGC 1960
CNGC 1976
CNGC 1982
b 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 6 ST
D 2 ST
C 1 ST
46kly X-Ray Source
B 4 ST
C 1 ST
bFS
b 3 ST
A 3 ST
M1 Crab Nebula 4kly
M36
c 6 ST
b 1 ST
C 3 ST
C 3 ST
b 3 ST
M79
M38 4600ly
Blue
M42 Orion Nebula Blue+Red
Trapezium in M42 1300ly
M43 Orion Nebula Extension
Red Near Zeta Ori
C 3 ST
B F ST
bFS
C 1 ST
c 1 ST
M78 Blue 1500ly
Tarantula Nebula Very Red
30 Dor Nebula (part)
M37 4200ly
C 1 ST
c 1 ST
c 6 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
M35 2800ly
Red Faint/Low Contrast
CLUS
CLUS sp=B1
CLUS + ENEB
CLUS + ENEB sp=O5
CLUS
c 1 ST
b1S
c 6 ST
b 6 ST
c1S
1600ly
Cluster in Rosette Nebula
Rosette Nebula 5300ly
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS + ENEB sp=O8
CLUS
CLUS
c 1 ST
c1S
b 6 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
S Mon + Cone Nebula 2400ly
4.5v
6.0v
5.9v
8.4v
8.5p
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLUS sp=B4
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS
720
420
720
1200
1200
7.2v
6.7v
7.7v
7.1v
6.5v
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS
c
c
c
c
c
1
1
1
1
1
ST
S
ST
ST
ST
38
58
15
35
44
780
480
1140
720
600
7.2v
4.1v
8.0v
8.0v
7.4p
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLUS
CLUS + ENEB sp=O9
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS
c
c
c
c
c
1
6
1
1
1
ST
ST
ST
ST
S
36
34
37
29
52
1068
600
600
1800
1140
8.4
8.3v
8.3v
4.4v
6.7v
GALAXY Sc III
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS sp=B3
OPEN CLUS
CNGC 2099
CNGC 2287
CNGC 2323
UGC 3918
CNGC 2422
C 1 ST
c 1 ST
D 1 ST
c 1 ST
c1S
b 5 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
D 1 ST
c 1 ST
M41 2200ly
M50
Open Clus = 20' Very Red
17.8x11.0
M47 1600ly
- 38 -
CNGC Catalog (continued)
CNGC#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
CNGC 2437
CNGC 2447
C
D
C
C
C
1
6
1
6
1
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
M46 5400ly (+CNGC 2438 PN)
M93 Includes dark nebula
1000ly
Open Cluster + Red Nebula
C
C
D
C
C
1
1
1
1
1
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1200ly
2437
2447
2451
2467
2477
07
07
07
07
07
41.9
44.6
45.4
52.5
52.3
-14
-23
-37
-26
-38
49
52
58
24
33
1620
1320
2700
480
1620
6.1v
6.2v
2.8v
7.2p
5.8v
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS
sp=B8
+ DNEB
sp=B5
+ ENEB
2516
2547
2548
2631
2632
07
08
08
08
08
58.2
10.7
13.7
40.2
40.1
-60
-49
-05
-53
+19
52
16
47
04
59
1800
1200
3240
3000
5700
3.8v
4.7v
5.8v
2.5v
3.1v
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
OPEN
CLUS sp=B8
CLUS
CLUS
CLUS II 3 p
CLUS sp=A0
2682
2808
2841
2903
2997
08 51.1
09 11.9
09 22.1
09 32.1
09 45.7
+11
-64
+50
+21
-31
49
51
58
30
12
1800
828
486
756
486
6.9v
6.3v
9.3
8.9
10.6
OPEN CLUS sp=F2
GLOB CLUS sp=F8
GALAXY Sb- I
GALAXY Sb+ I-II
GALAXY Sc I
3031
3034
3109
3114
3115
09
09
10
10
10
55.7
55.9
03.1
02.7
05.3
+69
+69
-26
-60
-07
04
41
10
08
43
1542
672
870
2100
498
6.9
8.4
10.4
4.2v
9.2
GALAXY Sb I-II
GALAXY P EDGE-ON
GALAXY Ir+ IV-V
OPEN CLUS sp=B5
GALAXY E6
3157
3198
3201
3228
3231
10
10
10
10
10
08.4
20.0
17.5
21.7
27.4
+12
+45
-46
-51
-57
18
33
24
43
38
642
498
1092
1080
480
9.9v
10.4
6.8v
6.0v
4.3v
3234
3242
3293
3324
3328
10
10
10
10
10
28.5
24.8
35.9
37.5
43.2
+68
-18
-58
-58
-64
26
38
14
38
24
738
1250
360
360
3000
3351
3368
3372
3379
3496
10
10
10
10
10
43.9
46.7
45.1
47.8
59.8
+11
+11
-59
+12
-60
42
49
41
35
20
3521
3532
3556
3572
3587
11 05.9
11 06.5
11 11.6
11 10.5
11 14.8
-00
-58
+55
-60
+55
3604
3621
3623
3627
3628
11
11
11
11
11
17.9
18.3
18.9
20.2
20.3
3680
3709
3718
3766
3992
11
11
11
11
11
4052
4111
4192
4216
4236
4244
4254
4258
4303
4321
CNGC 2548
* IC 2391
CNGC 2632
M44 Praesepe/Beehive 590ly
D 1 ST
C 2 ST
C 5 ST
b 5 ST
C 5 ST
M67 Very old 2700ly
30kly
8.1x3.8
12.6x6.6
8.1x6.5
CNGC 3031
UGC 5322
UGC A194
C 5 ST
C 5 ST
c 5 ST
b 1 ST
c 5 ST
M81 25.7x14.1 Near M82
M82 11.2x4.6 Exploding
14.5x3.5
2800ly
8.3x3.2
GALAXY dE3
GALAXY Sc II
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUSTER
OPEN CLUS + DNEB I 3 m n
* UGC 5470
UGC 72
c5S
c 5 ST
b 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 6 ST
10.7x8.3
8.3x3.7
10.6
8.6p
4.7v
6.7v
1.9v
GALAXY S+ IV-V
PLAN NEB
OPEN CLUS + ENEB
DIFF ENEB + RNEB + OPEN
OPEN CLUS II 3 m
* IC 2574
c 5 ST
C 4 ST
c 6 ST
c 6 ST
b 1 ST
12.3x5.9 UGC 5666
Ghost of Jupiter
444
426
7200
270
540
9.7
9.2
5.3
9.3
8.2v
GALAXY S(B)b II
GALAXY Sbp
DIFF ENEB + OPEN CLUS HII
GALAXY E1 2-SYS
OPEN CLUS
UGC 5850
UGC 5882
C 5 ST
C 5 ST
A 6 ST
C A ST
c1S
M95 7.4x5.1 Near M96
M96 7.1x5.1 Near M95
Eta Carina Nebula Red 9kly
M105 4.5x4.0
02
40
41
14
02
570
3300
498
420
194
8.9
3.0v
10.1
6.6v
12.0p
GALAXY Sb+ II
OPEN CLUS sp=B8
GALAXY Sc NEAR EDGE-ON
OPEN CLUS + ENEB
PLAN NEB
UGC 6150
UGC 6225
9.5x5.0
1400ly
M108 8.3x2.5 Near M97
CNGC 3587
b 5 ST
b 1 ST
C 5 ST
c 6 ST
C 4 ST
-62
-32
+13
+12
+13
42
49
05
59
35
720
600
600
522
888
8.2p
9.9
9.3
9.0
9.5
OPEN CLUS II 3 m
GALAXY Sc III-IV
GALAXY Sb II:
GALAXY Sb+ II:
GALAXY Sb NEAR EDGE-ON
* IC 2714
UGC A232
UGC 6328
UGC 6346
UGC 6350
c 1 ST
c 5 ST
C 5 ST
C 5 ST
C 5 ST
10.0x6.5
M65 10.0x3.3 Near M66
M66 8.7x4.4 Near M65
14.8x3.6
25.7
36.6
32.6
36.2
57.6
-43
-63
+53
-61
+53
15
02
04
37
22
720
900
522
720
456
7.6v
4.5v
10.5
5.3v
9.8
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS II 1 p n
GALAXY SBap
OPEN CLUS sp=B1
GALAXY S(B)b+ I
UGC 6937
c 1 ST
b 1 ST
c 5 ST
c 1 ST
D 5 ST
8.7x4.5
5800ly
M109 7.6x4.9
12
12
12
12
12
01.9
07.1
13.9
15.9
16.7
-63
+43
+14
+13
+69
12
04
54
08
28
480
288
570
498
1116
8.8p
10.8
10.1
10.0
9.7
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY S0:
GALAXY Sb I-II: 3-SYS
GALAXY Sb II
GALAXY SB+ IV
UGC
UGC
UGC
UGC
7103
7231
7284
7306
c 1 ST
C 5 ST
D A ST
c 5 ST
b 5 ST
4.8x1.1
M98 9.5x3.2
8.3x2.2 Near Edge-On
18.6x6.9
12
12
12
12
12
17.6
18.9
19.0
22.0
23.0
+37
+14
+47
+04
+15
48
25
18
28
49
972
324
1092
360
414
10.2
9.8
8.3
9.7
9.4
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
UGC 7322
UGC 7345
UGC 7353
UGC 7420
UGC 7450
b 5 ST
D 5 ST
C 5 ST
D A ST
D 5 ST
16.2x2.5
M99 5.4x4.8
M106 18.2x7.9
M61 6.0x5.5 Face-On
M100 6.9x6.2 Brite Nucleus
S- IV: EDGE-ON
Sc I NEAR FACE-ON
Sb+p
Sc I 2-SYS
Sc I FACE-ON
CNGC 2682
M48
UGC 4966
UGC 5079
UGC A181
* IC 2581
* IC 2602
UGC 5902
* IC 2944
UGC 624
9kly
M97 Owl Nebula 12kly
- 39 -
CNGC Catalog (continued)
CNGC#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
4349
4374
4382
4395
4406
12
12
12
12
12
24.2
25.1
25.5
25.8
26.3
-61 54
+12 53
+18 11
+33 32
+12 56
960
300
426
774
444
7.4v
9.3
9.2
10.2
9.2
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY E1
GALAXY Ep 2-SYS
GALAXY S+ IV-V
GALAXY E3
UGC
UGC
UGC
UGC
7494
7508
7524
7532
c 1 ST
C 5 ST
C A ST
c5S
C 5 ST
M84 5.0x4.4 Near M86
M85 7.1x5.2
12.9x11.0
M86 7.4x5.5
4438
4472
4486
4501
4517
12
12
12
12
12
27.8
29.8
30.9
32.1
32.8
+13
+08
+12
+14
+00
00
00
23
25
06
558
534
432
414
612
10.1
8.4
8.6
9.5
10.5
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
Sap
E4
E1 + E0 2-SYS
Sb+ I MULTI-ARM
Sc 2-SYS
UGC
UGC
UGC
UGC
UGC
7574
7629
7654
7675
7694
c 5 ST
C 5 ST
D A ST
D 5 ST
c A ST
9.3x3.9
M49 8.9x7.4
M87 7.2x6.8 + CNGC 4471
M88 6.9x3.9
10.2x1.9 Near Edge-On
4548
4552
4559
4565
4569
12
12
12
12
12
35.5
35.7
36.0
36.4
36.9
+14
+12
+27
+25
+13
29
33
57
59
09
324
252
630
972
570
10.2
9.8
9.9
9.6
9.5
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
SBb + Sc 2-SYS
E0
Sc II-III 3-SYS
Sb I: + 3-SYS FNT
Sb+
UGC
UGC
UGC
UGC
UGC
7753
7760
7766
7772
7786
D A ST
D 5 ST
C A ST
B A ST
C 5 ST
M91 5.4x4.4 Near CNGC 4571
M89 4.2x4.2
10.5x4.9 Coarse Structure
M40 16.2x2.8 Edge-On Lane
M90 9.5x4.7
4579
4590
4594
4605
4609
12
12
12
12
12
37.8
39.4
39.9
40.0
42.4
+11
-26
-11
+61
-62
49
46
38
36
59
324
720
534
330
300
9.8
8.2v
8.3
11.0
6.9v
GALAXY Sb
GLOB CLUS
GALAXY SbGALAXY SBcp Edge-On
OPEN CLUS
UGC 7796
CNGC 4590
CNGC 4594
UGC 7831
C 5 ST
D 2 ST
C 5 ST
C 5 ST
c 1 ST
M58 5.4x4.4 Near CNGC 4621
M68
M104 8.9x4.1 “Sombrero”
5.5x2.3 Edge-On
4621
4631
4649
4656
4725
12
12
12
12
12
42.1
42.1
43.7
43.9
50.5
+11
+32
+11
+32
+25
38
32
33
10
33
306
906
432
828
660
9.8
9.3
8.8
10.4
9.2
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
UGC
UGC
UGC
UGC
UGC
7858
7865
7898
7907
7989
D 5 ST
B 5 ST
D 5 ST
C A ST
C 5 ST
M59 5.1x3.4 Near CNGC 4579
15.1x3.3 Edge-On
M60 7.2x6.2 Near CNGC 4621
13.8x3.3 Near CNGC 4631
11.0x7.9
4736
4755
4762
4826
4833
12
12
12
12
12
50.9
53.6
53.0
56.7
59.4
+41
-60
+11
+21
-70
08
21
14
41
52
660
600
522
558
810
8.2
4.2v
10.2
8.5
7.4v
GALAXY Sb-p II:
OPEN CLUS sp=B3
GALAXY SB0
GALAXY SbGLOB CLUS
UGC 7996
C 5 ST
c 1 ST
c 5 ST
C 5 ST
b 2 ST
M94 11.0x9.1
Jewel Box 6800ly
8.7x1.6
M64 9.3x5.4 Black Eye Gal
4852
4945
5024
5033
5053
13
13
13
13
13
00.1
05.3
13.0
13.5
16.4
-59
-49
+18
+36
+17
36
29
10
36
40
660
1200
756
630
630
8.9p
9.5
7.7v
10.1
9.8v
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY SBc: 2-SYS
GLOB CLUS
GALAXY Sb+ I-II:
GLOB CLUS
5055
5102
5128
5138
5139
13
13
13
13
13
15.8
21.9
25.3
27.3
26.8
+42
-36
-43
-59
-47
02
39
01
01
29
738
558
1092
480
2178
8.6
10.0
7.0
7.6v
3.7v
GALAXY Sb+ II
GALAXY S0
GALAXY S0p
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=F7
UGC 8334
5194
5236
5272
5281
5286
13
13
13
13
13
30.0
37.1
42.3
46.7
46.2
+47 11
-29 51
+28 23
-62 54
-51 22
660
672
972
300
546
8.4
8.2
6.4v
5.9v
7.6v
GALAXY Sc I 2-SYS FACE
GALAXY Sc I-II FACE-ON
GLOB CLUS sp=F7
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
UGC 8493
CNGC 5236
CNGC 5272
5316
5457
5460
5474
5617
13
14
14
14
14
54.0
03.3
07.7
05.1
29.8
-61
+54
-48
+53
-60
52
21
19
40
44
840
1614
1500
270
600
6.0v
7.7
5.6v
10.9
6.3v
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY Sc I FACE-ON
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY Sc
OPEN CLUS
5662
5746
5749
5822
5823
14
14
14
15
15
35.1
45.0
48.9
05.3
05.7
-56
+01
-54
-54
-55
34
57
32
21
36
720
474
480
2400
600
5.5v
10.6
8.8p
6.5p
7.9v
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY Sb EDGE-ON
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
5824
5897
5904
5907
5925
15
15
15
15
15
04.0
17.4
18.6
15.9
27.7
-33
-21
+02
+56
-54
05
00
05
19
32
372
756
1044
738
900
9.0v
8.6v
5.8v
10.4
8.4p
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=F6
GALAXY Sb+ II:
OPEN CLUS
E3
Sc III Edge-On
E1
Sc IV + Ir+ 2-SYS
S(B)b I
UGC 8016
UGC 8062
CNGC 5024
UGC 8307
Omega Cen
UGC 8981
UGC 9013
UGC 9499
CNGC 5904
UGC 9801
c 1 ST
b A ST
D 2 ST
c 5 ST
c 2 ST
20.0x4.
M53
10.5x5.6
C 5 ST
c 5 ST
B 5 ST
c 1 ST
A 2 ST
M63 12.3x7.6 Sunflower Gal
9.3x3.5
18.2x14.5 Centarus A X-Ray
B A ST
B 5 ST
B 2 ST
c 1 ST
b 2 ST
M51 11.0x7.8 Whirlpool Gal
M83 11.2x10.2
M3 35kly
c 1 ST
C5S
c 1 ST
C 5 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
C 5 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
c 2 ST
b 2 ST
B 2 ST
C 5 ST
c 1 ST
Omega Centauri 17kly
M101 26.9x26.3 Pinwheel
4.5x4.2
7.9x1.7
M5 26kly
12.3x1.8
- 40 -
CNGC Catalog (continued)
CNGC#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
5927
5986
6025
6067
6087
15
15
16
16
16
28.0
46.1
03.7
13.3
18.9
-50
-37
-60
-54
-57
40
46
30
13
54
720
588
720
780
720
8.3v
7.1v
5.1v
5.6v
5.4v
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS sp=B3
OPEN CLUS
b 2 ST
b 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
6093
6101
6121
6124
6144
16
16
16
16
16
17.1
25.7
23.7
25.6
27.2
-23
-72
-26
-40
-26
00
13
31
42
03
534
642
1578
1740
558
7.2v
9.3v
5.9v
5.8v
9.1v
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=G0
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
6152
6167
6169
6171
6192
16
16
16
16
16
32.8
34.4
34.1
32.5
40.4
-52
-49
-44
-13
-43
38
36
03
02
23
1800
480
420
600
480
8.1p
6.7v
6.6p
8.1v
8.5p
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
6193
6200
6205
6208
6218
16
16
16
16
16
41.4
44.3
41.7
49.5
47.2
-48
-47
+36
-53
-01
46
29
27
49
57
900
720
996
960
870
5.2v
7.4v
5.9v
7.2v
6.6v
OPEN CLUS + ENEB + RNEB
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=F6
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=F8
6231
6242
6250
6254
6259
16
16
16
16
17
54.3
55.6
58.0
57.1
00.7
-41
-39
-45
-04
-44
48
30
48
07
41
900
540
480
906
600
2.6v
6.4v
5.9v
6.6v
8.0v
OPEN CLUS + ENEB sp=O9
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=G1
OPEN CLUS
6266
6273
6281
6284
6293
17
17
17
17
17
01.3
02.6
04.8
04.5
10.3
-30
-26
-37
-24
-26
07
15
53
45
34
846
810
480
336
474
6.6v
7.2v
5.4v
9.0v
8.2v
GLOB CLUS OBLATE
GLOB CLUS OBLATE
OPEN CLUS + ENEB
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
6304
6316
6322
6333
6341
17
17
17
17
17
14.6
16.6
18.5
19.2
17.2
-29
-28
-42
-18
+43
28
08
57
31
09
408
294
600
558
672
8.4v
9.0v
6.0v
7.9v
6.5v
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=F1
6353
6356
6362
6366
6367
17
17
17
17
17
24.7
23.7
31.8
27.7
25.2
-49
-17
-67
-05
+37
57
49
03
05
45
720
432
642
498
45
6.9v
8.4v
8.3v
10.0v
14.5
OPEN CLUS II 3 m
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GALAXY
6383
6388
6397
6398
6400
17
17
17
17
17
34.7
36.3
40.9
20.2
40.8
-32
-44
-53
+57
-36
35
45
41
55
56
300
522
1542
2010
480
5.5v
6.9v
5.7v
11.9p
8.8p
OPEN CLUS + ENEB
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=F5
GALAXY dE3
OPEN CLUS
6401
6402
6405
6416
6425
17
17
17
17
17
38.6
37.6
40.1
44.4
47.0
-23
-03
-32
-32
-31
55
17
13
21
31
336
702
900
1080
480
9.5v
7.6v
4.2v
8.4v
7.2v
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS sp=B4
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
6431
6432
6441
6451
6469
17
17
17
17
17
46.3
47.9
50.2
50.7
52.9
+05
-30
-37
-30
-22
43
00
03
13
21
2460
20
468
480
720
4.2v
13.6p
7.4v
8.2p
8.2p
OPEN CLUS III 2 p
PLAN NEB
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
* IC 4665
**
b 1 ST
f4S
c 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
6475
6494
6514
6520
6522
17
17
18
18
18
54.0
57.0
02.3
03.5
03.6
-34
-19
-23
-27
-30
49
01
02
54
02
4800
1620
1740
360
336
3.3v
5.5v
6.3v
6.7p
8.6v
OPEN CLUS sp=B5
OPEN CLUS sp=B8
DIFF ENEB + OPEN CLUS HII
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
CNGC 6475
CNGC 6494
CNGC 6514
C 1 ST
D 1 ST
B 6 ST
c 1 ST
c 2 ST
CNGC 6093
CNGC 6121
CNGC 6171
CNGC 6205
CNGC 6218
CNGC 6254
CNGC 6266
CNGC 6273
CNGC 6333
CNGC 6341
* IC 4651
* UGC 10822
CNGC 6402
CNGC 6405
D 2 ST
c 2 ST
B 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
c1S
D 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 6 ST
c1S
B 2 ST
c 1 ST
D 2 ST
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
4700ly
M80
M4 14kly
M107
M13 Hercules Globular
M12 24kly
b 6 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
D 2 ST
c 1 ST
In 240' ENEB 5800ly
D 2 ST
D 2 ST
c 6 ST
c 2 ST
c 2 ST
M62 Non-symmetrical
M19 Oblate Shape Globular
c 2 ST
c 2 ST
c 1 ST
D 2 ST
D 2 ST
M10 20kly
M9
M92 X-Ray Source 26kly
c 1 ST
c2S
b 2 ST
c 2 ST
f5
c 6 ST
b 2 ST
b 2 ST
c5S
c 1 ST
d 2 ST
D 2 ST
C 1 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
ENEB is 80' in diameter
9kly
33.5x18.9 Maybe Can’t See
M14
M6 1500ly
PK 359-0.1
M7 800ly
M23 1400ly
M20 Trifid Nebula 3500ly
- 41 -
CNGC Catalog (continued)
CNGC#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
CNGC 6523
B 6 ST
b 6 ST
D 1 ST
b 2 ST
c 4 ST
M8 Lagoon Nebula 5100ly
In M8 = Lagoon Nebula
M21
13kly
Blue-Green 300ly
6523
6530
6531
6541
6543
18
18
18
18
17
03.2
04.8
04.6
08.0
58.6
-24
-24
-22
-43
+66
23
20
30
44
38
5400
900
780
786
350
5.2
4.6v
5.9v
6.6v
8.8p
OPEN CLUS + ENEB sp=O5
OPEN CLUS + ENEB
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=F6
PLAN NEB
6544
6546
6553
6568
6569
18
18
18
18
18
07.4
07.2
09.5
12.8
13.6
-25
-23
-25
-21
-31
01
19
56
35
49
534
780
486
780
348
8.3v
8.0v
8.3v
8.6p
8.7v
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
6595
6611
6613
6618
6624
18
18
18
18
18
17.0
18.8
20.0
20.8
23.7
-19 53
-13 47
-17 08
-16 11
-30 21
660
2100
540
2760
354
7.0p
6.0v
6.9v
6.0v
8.3v
OPEN CLUS + RNEB
OPEN CLUS + ENEB sp=O7
OPEN CLUS
DIFF ENEB + OPEN CLUS HII
GLOB CLUS
6626
6630
6633
6634
6637
18
18
18
18
18
24.6
20.0
27.5
33.5
31.4
-24
-18
+06
-19
-32
52
26
34
14
21
672
4800
1620
2400
426
6.9v
4.7
4.6v
6.5
7.7v
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS SPARSE
GLOB CLUS
6642
6645
6653
6656
6664
18
18
18
18
18
31.5
32.6
39.0
36.3
36.8
-23
-16
+05
-23
-08
28
54
27
56
14
270
600
3120
1440
960
8.8v
8.5p
5.4p
5.1v
7.8v
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS III 2 m
GLOB CLUS sp=F7
OPEN CLUS
6681
6694
6705
6709
6712
18
18
18
18
18
43.2
45.4
51.1
51.5
53.1
-32
-09
-06
+10
-08
18
24
16
21
43
468
900
840
780
432
8.1v
8.0v
5.8v
6.7v
8.2v
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS sp=B8
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
CNGC 6681
CNGC 6694
CNGC 6705
D 2 ST
D 1 ST
C 1 ST
c 1 ST
c 2 ST
M70
M26
M11 Very rich 5600ly
6715
6716
6720
6723
6738
18
18
18
18
19
55.2
54.6
53.5
59.6
01.4
-30
-19
+33
-36
+11
28
53
02
38
36
546
420
150
660
900
7.7v
6.9v
9.7p
7.3v
8.3p
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
PLAN NEB RING-LIKE
GLOB CLUS sp=G4
OPEN CLUS
CNGC 6715
D 2 ST
c 1 ST
B 4 ST
b 2 ST
c1S
M54
6744
6752
6755
6774
6779
19
19
19
19
19
09.8
10.9
07.8
16.7
16.6
-63
-59
+04
-16
+30
51
59
13
17
10
930
1224
900
2880
426
9.0
5.4v
7.5v
9.0
8.3v
GALAXY S(B)b+ II
GLOB CLUS sp=F6
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
6791
6809
6811
6822
6823
19
19
19
19
19
20.8
40.1
38.2
44.9
43.2
+37
-30
+46
-14
+23
51
56
34
46
18
960
1140
780
612
720
9.5v
7.0
6.8v
9.4
7.1v
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=F5
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY Ir+ IV-V
OPEN CLUS + ENEB
6830
6838
6853
6864
6871
19
19
19
20
20
51.1
53.7
59.6
06.2
05.9
+23
+18
+22
-21
+35
05
47
43
55
47
720
432
910
360
1200
7.9v
8.3v
7.6p
8.6v
5.2v
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
PLAN NEB
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
6882
6883
6885
6888
6910
20 11.7
20 11.3
20 12.0
20 12.8
20 23.1
+26
+35
+26
+38
+40
33
51
29
19
47
1080
900
420
1200
480
8.1v
8.0p
5.7p
13.0v
7.4v
6913
6934
6939
6940
6946
20
20
20
20
20
+38
+07
+60
+28
+60
32
24
38
18
09
420
354
480
1860
660
6.6v
8.9v
7.8v
6.3v
8.9
23.9
34.2
31.4
34.6
34.8
CNGC 6531
b 2 ST
c 1 ST
b 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 2 ST
CNGC 6611
CNGC 6613
CNGC 6618
CNGC 6626
* CNGC 6630
* CNGC 6634
CNGC 6637
* IC 4756
CNGC 6656
CNGC 6720
CNGC 6779
CNGC 6809
CNGC 6838
CNGC 6853
CNGC 6864
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
DIFF ENEB
OPEN CLUS + ENEB
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY Sc I
c6S
D 6 ST
D 1 ST
B 6 ST
c 2 ST
D 2 ST
c1 T
b 1 ST
c1
D 2 ST
c 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
C 2 ST
c 1 ST
b 5 ST
b 2 ST
c 1 ST
c1 T
D 2 ST
c 1 ST
D 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 5 ST
c 6 ST
c 1 ST
D 2 ST
B 4 ST
D 2 ST
c 1 ST
c
c
c
c
c
CNGC 6913
UGC 11597
1
1
1
3
6
S
ST
ST
ST
ST
D 1 ST
c 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
b 5 ST
M16 Eagle Nebula 5500ly
M18
M17 Omega/Swan/Horseshoe
M28
M24 Best with large field
M25 IC 4725 Sparse Cluster
M69
M22 10kly
M57 Ring Nebula 5kly
24kly
15.5x10.2
17kly
M56
M55 20kly
10.2x9.5
M71
M27 Dumbbell Nebula 3500ly
M75
Red
In Gamma Cygnus Nebula
M29
11.0x9.8
- 42 -
CNGC Catalog (continued)
CNGC#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
CNGC 6981
CNGC 6994
D 2 ST
D 1 ST
b 3 ST
C 4 ST
c 1 ST
M72
M73
North American Nebula 3kly
Saturn Nebula 3000ly
6981
6994
7000
7009
7036
20
20
21
21
21
53.5
59.0
01.8
04.3
12.1
-12
-12
+44
-11
+47
33
37
12
22
43
354
168
7200
100
240
9.4v
8.9p
6.6
8.3p
6.8v
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
DIFF ENEB HII
PLAN NEB
OPEN CLUS I 1 m
7039
7063
7078
7082
7086
21
21
21
21
21
12.2
24.4
30.0
29.4
30.6
+45
+36
+12
+47
+51
39
30
10
05
35
1500
480
738
1500
540
7.6v
7.0v
6.4v
7.2v
8.4v
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=F2
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
CNGC 7078
c1S
c1S
C 2 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
7089
7092
7093
7099
7143
21
21
21
21
21
33.5
32.2
39.1
40.3
53.4
-00 50
+48 26
+57 30
-23 11
+47 16
774
1920
3000
660
540
6.5v
4.6v
3.5v
7.5v
7.2v
GLOB CLUS sp=F4
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS + DNEB II 3 m n
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS + DNEB IV 2 p n
CNGC 7089
CNGC 7092
* IC 1396
CNGC 7099
* IC 5146
C 2 ST
D 1 ST
b 6 ST
D2S
c 6 ST
7160
7202
7209
7243
7331
21
22
22
22
22
53.7
10.5
05.2
15.3
37.1
+62
+52
+46
+49
+34
36
50
30
53
26
420
480
1500
1260
642
6.1v
9.0p
6.7v
6.4v
9.5
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS II 1 p
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY Sb I-II
7380
7635
7640
7654
7686
22
23
23
23
23
47.0
20.7
22.1
24.2
30.2
+58
+61
+40
+61
+49
06
12
51
36
08
720
900
642
780
900
7.2v
12.8
10.9
6.9v
5.6v
OPEN CLUS + ENEB
DIFF ENEB
GALAXY S(B)b+ II:
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
7790
7793
7815
23 58.5
23 57.9
00 02.1
+61 13
-32 34
-15 28
1020
546
612
8.5v
9.1
10.9
OPEN CLUS sp=B1
GALAXY Sdm III-IV
GALAXY Ir+ IV-V
* IC 1369
* IC 1434
UGC 12113
UGC 12554
CNGC 7654
* UGC A444
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
c 1 ST
C 5 ST
M15 X-Ray Source 34kly
M2 40kly
M39
M30
10.7x4.0
c 6 ST
c 3 ST
c 5 ST
D 1 ST
c 1 ST
Red Nebula
Bubble Nebula Red
10.7x2.5
M52
c 1 ST
c 5 ST
c5S
10300ly
9.1x6.6
10.2x4.2
- 43 -
3. STAR Catalog
STAR#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
*
*
*
*
*
1
2
3
4
5
00
00
00
00
00
08.3
09.2
13.2
25.7
26.3
+29
+59
+15
-77
-42
06
10
12
15
18
2.1v
2.3v
2.8v
2.8v
2.4v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B8.5p IV:(Hg+Mn)
F2 III-IV
B2 IV
G1 IV
K0 IIIb
Alpha And
Beta Cas
Gamma Peg
Beta Hyi
Alpha Phe
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*
*
*
*
*
6
7
8
9
10
00
00
00
00
01
39.4
40.5
43.6
56.7
06.1
+30
+56
-17
+60
-46
52
33
59
43
43
3.3v
2.2v
2.0v
2.5v
3.3v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
K3 III
K0 IIIa
G9.5 III
B0 IVnpe(shell) + ?
G8 III
Delta And A
Alpha Cas
Beta Cet
Gamma Cas
Beta Phe AB
8
8
8
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*
*
*
*
*
11
12
13
14
15
01
01
01
01
01
09.8
25.8
37.7
54.7
58.7
+35
+60
-57
+20
-61
37
15
14
49
34
2.1v
2.7v
0.5v
2.6v
2.9v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
M0 IIIa
A5 IV
B3 Vnp (shell)
A5 V
A9 III-IVn
Beta And
Delta Cas
Alpha Eri
Beta Ari
Alpha Hyi
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Mirach
Ruchbah Ecl-Bin @759d
Achernar
Sharatan
*
*
*
*
*
16
17
18
19
20
02
02
02
02
02
04.0
07.2
09.5
14.7
19.4
+42
+23
+34
+89
-02
21
28
59
17
58
2.3v
2.0v
3.0v
2.0v
2.1v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
K3 IIb + B9 V + A0 V
K2 IIIab
A5 IV
F5-8 Ib + F3 V
M5.5-9 IIIe + Bpe
Gamma And A
Alpha Ari
Beta Tri
Alpha UMi A
Omicron Cet A
9
8
8
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Almaak B=5.4 C=6.2
Hamal
*
*
*
*
*
21
22
23
24
25
02
03
03
03
03
58.3
02.3
04.8
08.2
24.4
-40
+04
+53
+40
+49
19
05
31
58
52
3.2v
2.5v
2.9v
2.1v
1.8v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
A5 IV
M1.5 IIIa
G8 III + A2 V
B8 V + F:
F5 Ib
Theta Eri A
Alpha Cet
Gamma Per
Beta Per
Alpha Per
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Acamar
Menkar
*
*
*
*
*
26
27
28
29
30
03
03
03
03
03
43.0
47.6
47.2
54.2
57.8
+47
+27
-74
+31
+40
48
06
15
54
01
3.0v
2.9v
3.2v
2.9v
2.9v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B5 IIIn
B7 IIIn
M2 III
B1 Ib + B8 V
B0.5 IV + B9.5 V
Delta Per
Eta Tau
Gamma Hyi
Zeta Per A
Epsilon Per A
8
8
8
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*
*
*
*
*
31
32
33
34
35
03
04
04
04
04
58.0
34.0
35.9
49.9
57.0
-13 30
-55 02
+16 31
+06 57
+33 11
3.0v
3.3v
0.9v
3.2v
2.7v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
M0.5 III-IIIb
A0p III:(Si) + B9 IV
K5 III
F6 V
K3 II
Gamma Eri
Alpha Dor AB
Alpha Tau A
Pi^3 Ori
Iota Aur
8
9
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Zaurak
A=3.8 B=4.3
Aldebaran
Hassaleh
Ayn
*
*
*
*
*
36
37
38
39
40
05
05
05
05
05
02.0
05.5
06.6
07.9
12.9
+43
-22
+41
-05
-16
49
22
14
05
12
3.0v
3.2v
3.2v
2.8v
3.1v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
A9 Iae + B
K5 III
B3 V
A3 IIIn
B9p IV: (Hg+Mn)
Epsilon Aur A
Epsilon Lep
Eta Ori AB
Theta Eri
Mu Lep
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Anz
*
*
*
*
*
41
42
43
44
45
05
05
05
05
05
14.6
16.6
24.5
25.2
26.3
-08
+46
-02
+06
+28
12
00
24
21
37
90
0.1v
0.1v
3.3v
1.6v
1.7v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B8 Iae + B5 V
G6: III + G2: III
B1 IV + B
B2 III
B7 III
Beta Ori A
Alpha Aur AB
Eta Ori AB
Gamma Ori
Beta Tau
9
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Bellatrix
Alnath
*
*
*
*
*
46
47
48
49
50
05
05
05
05
05
28.3
32.0
32.7
46.5
36.2
-20
-00
-17
-05
-01
46
19
49
55
12
26
2.8v
2.2v
2.6v
2.8v
1.7v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
G5 II + ?
O9.5 II
F0 Ib
O9 III + B7 IIIp
B0 Ia
Beta Lep A
Delta Ori A
Alpha Lep
Iota Ori A
Epsilon Ori
9
8
8
9
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
B=7.4
Mintaka
Arneb
Nair al Saif B=7.3
Alnilam
*
*
*
*
*
51
52
53
54
55
05
05
05
05
05
37.6
39.7
40.8
47.8
51.0
+21
-34
-01
-09
-35
09
04
56
40
46
24
3.0v
2.6v
2.1v
2.1v
3.1v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B2 IIIpe (shell)
B7 IV
O9.5 Ib + B0 III
B0.5 Ia
K1.5 III
Zeta Tau
Alpha Col A
Zeta Ori A
Kappa Ori
Beta Col
8
8
9
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Phaet
Alnitak B=4.2
Saiph
Wezn
*
*
*
*
*
56
57
58
59
60
05
05
05
06
06
55.2
59.5
59.8
14.9
20.3
+07
+44
+37
+22
-30
25
57
13
31
03
40
0.4v
1.9v
2.6v
3.3v
3.0v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
M2 Iab
A1 IV
A0p III: (si) + G2 V
M3 III
B2.5 V
Alpha Ori
Beta Aur
Theta Aur AB
Eta Gem
Zeta CMa
8
8
9
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Betelgeuse
Menkalinan
Bogardus B=7.2 G2V
Propus
Phurud
20
10
100
180
10
130
90
2
110
Alpheratz
Caph
Algenib
Ankaa
Shedir
Diphda
Marj B=8.8
B=Similar mag & spectrum
Polaris B=8.2
Mira B=9.5
Algol
Mirphak
Alcyone
B=9.2
B=7.9
Hoedus II
Kursa
Rigel B=7.6 C=7.6
Capella
- 44 -
STAR Catalog (continued)
STAR#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
2.8v
2.0v
-0.7v
1.9v
3.2v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
M3 IIIab
B1 II-III
A9 II
A1 IVs
B8 IIIn
Mu Gem
Beta CMa
Alpha Car
Gamma Gem
Nu Pup
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Tejat Posterior
Murzim
Canopus
Alhena
3.0v
-1.5v
3.3v
2.9v
1.5v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
G8 Ib
A0mA1 Va
A6 Vn
K1 III
B2 II
Epsilon Gem
Alpha CMa A
Alpha Pic
Tau Pup
Epsilon CMa A
8
9
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Mebsuta
Sirius B=8.5 50y
3.0v
1.8v
2.6v
2.7v
2.5v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B3 Iab
F8 Ia
M5 IIIe
K3 Ib
B5 Ia
Omicron^2 CMa
Delta CMa
L2 Pup
Pi Pup
Eta CMa
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
2.9v
3.3v
1.9v
2.9v
0.4v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B8 V
K5 III + G5: V
A1 V + A2mA5
A2mA5 + A1 V
F5 IV-V + ?
Beta CMi
Sigma Pup A
Alpha Gem A
Alpha Gem B
Alpha CMi A
8
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Gomeisa
1.1v
3.3v
2.3v
2.7v
1.7v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
K0 IIIb
G6 Ib
O5 Iafn
F6 IIp (var)
WC8 + O9 I:
Beta Gem
Xi Pup
Zeta Pup
Rho Pup
Gamma^2 Vel
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Pollux
1.9v
2.0v
3.1v
3.1v
2.2v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
K3: III
A1 IV
G9 II-III
A7 IVn + M1 V
K4 Ib-IIa
Epsilon Car
Delta Vel AB
Zeta Hya
Iota UMa A
Lambda Vel
8
9
8
9
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Avior
B=5.0
*
*
*
*
*
61
62
63
64
65
06
06
06
06
06
22.9
22.7
24.0
37.7
37.7
+22
-17
-52
+16
-43
31
58
42
24
12
*
*
*
*
*
66
67
68
69
70
06
06
06
06
06
44.0
45.2
48.2
49.9
58.6
+25
-16
-61
-50
-28
08
43
56
37
58
*
*
*
*
*
71
72
73
74
75
07
07
07
07
07
03.1
08.4
13.5
17.2
24.2
-23
-26
-44
-37
-26
50
23
38
05
19
*
*
*
*
*
76
77
78
79
80
07
07
07
07
07
27.2
29.3
34.6
34.6
39.3
+08
-43
+31
+31
+05
17
17
53
53
14
*
*
*
*
*
81
82
83
84
85
07
07
08
08
08
45.4
49.3
03.7
07.6
09.5
+28
-24
-30
-24
-47
02
52
01
19
21
*
*
*
*
*
86
87
88
89
90
08
08
08
08
09
22.5
44.7
55.5
59.3
08.0
-59
-54
+05
+48
-43
31
43
56
03
25
*
*
*
*
*
91
92
93
94
95
09
09
09
09
09
13.3
17.1
21.1
22.1
27.6
-69
-59
+34
-55
-08
44
17
23
01
39
1.7v
2.2v
3.1v
2.5v
2.0v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
A1 III
A8 II
K7 IIIab
B2 IV-V
K3 II-III
Beta Car
Iota Car
Alpha Lyn
Kappa Vel
Alpha Hya
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Miaplacidus
Turais
* 96
* 97
* 98
* 99
*100
09
09
09
09
10
31.2
33.0
45.9
47.2
08.5
-57
+51
+23
-65
+11
01
41
46
05
58
3.1v
3.2v
3.0v
3.0v
1.4v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
K5 III
F6 IV
G1 II
A5 Ib + B7 III
B7 Vn
N Vel
Theta UMa
1 Leo
Nu Car AB
Alpha Leo A
8
8
8
9
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
HR3803
*101
*102
*103
*104
*105
10
10
10
10
10
13.7
20.0
22.4
32.0
43.0
-70
+19
+41
-61
-64
02
51
30
42
24
3.3v
2.6v
3.1v
3.3v
2.8v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B8 IIIn
K1 IIIb Fe-0.5 + *
M0 IIIp
B4 Vne
B0.5 Vp
Omega Car
Gamma Leo A
Mu Uma
Rho Car
Theta Car
8
9
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*106
*107
*108
*109
*110
10 46.8
10 49.7
11 01.9
11 03.8
11 09.7
-49 26
-16 11
+56 23
+61 45
+44 30
2.7v
3.1v
2.4v
1.8v
3.0v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
G5 III + F8: V
K2 III
A0mA1 IV-V
K0 IIIa + A8 V
K1 III
Mu Vel AB
Ny Hya
Beta UMa
Alpha UMa AB
Psi UMa
9
8
8
9
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*111
*112
*113
*114
*115
11
11
11
11
11
14.2
14.2
35.8
49.1
53.8
+20
+15
-63
+14
+53
32
26
02
34
41
2.6v
3.3v
3.1v
2.1v
2.4v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
A4 V
A2 Vs
B9 III
A3 V
A0 IV-Vn
Delta Leo
Theta Leo
Lambda Cen
Beta Leo
Gamma UMa
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*116
*117
*118
*119
*120
12
12
12
12
12
08.4
10.1
15.1
15.5
15.8
-50
-22
-58
+57
-17
44
37
45
01
33
2.5v
3.0v
2.8v
3.3v
2.6v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B2 IVne
K3 IIIa
B2 IV
A2 IV-Vn
B8p III: (Hg+Mn)
Delta Cen
Epsilon Crv
Delta Cru
Delta UMa
Gamma Crv
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
95
220
25
25
40
20
40
50
50
20
3
Adara
Wezen
HR2748
Aludra
Castor A
Castor B
Procyon B=10.3
Naos
Talitha BC=10.8
Suhail
Alphard
Ras Elased Aus
B=6.3
Regulus
Algieba B=3.5 G7 III Fe-1
Tania Australis
HR4140
B=6.4
Merak
Dubhe B=4.8
Zosma
Chort
Denebola
Phad
Minkar
Megrez
Gienah Ghurab
- 45 -
STAR Catalog (continued)
STAR#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
50
50
240
1.3v
1.7v
3.0v
1.6v
2.7v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B0.5 IV + B1 Vn
B1 Vn + B0.5 IV
B9.5 III + K2 V
M3.5 III
G5 II
Alpha Cru A
Alpha Cru B
Delta Crv A
Gamma Cru
Beta Crv
9
9
9
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Acrux A B=1.7
Acrux B A=1.3
Algorab B=8.3
Gacrux
Kraz
2.7v
2.9v
3.0v
2.8v
3.1v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B2 IV-V
B9.5 III + A0 III
A0 III + B9.5 III
F1 V + F1 V
B2 V + B2.5 V
Alpha Mus
Gamma Cen A
Gamma Cen B
Gamma Vir AB
Beta Mus AB
8
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
B=3.0
A=2.9
Porrima B=3.5
B=4.1
1.2v
1.8v
2.9v
2.8v
3.0v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B0.5 III
A0p IV: (Cr+Eu)
A0p III: (Si+Eu+Sr)
G9 IIIab
G8 IIIa
Beta Cru
Epsilon UMa
Alpha^2 CVn A
Epsilon Vir
Gamma Hya
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
2.8v
2.3v
1.0v
2.3v
1.9v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
A2 V
A1p IV: (Si) + A1mA7
B1 V
B1 III
B3 V
Iota Cen
Zeta UMa A
Alpha Vir
Epsilon Cen
Eta UMa
8
9
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*121
*122
*123
*124
*125
12
12
12
12
12
26.6
26.7
29.9
31.2
34.4
-63
-63
-16
-57
-23
06
07
31
07
24
*126
*127
*128
*129
*130
12
12
12
12
12
37.2
41.6
41.5
41.7
46.2
-69
-48
-48
-01
-68
09
58
58
28
07
*131
*132
*133
*134
*135
12
12
12
13
13
47.7
54.0
56.1
02.2
19.0
-59 42
+55 58
+38 19
+10 58
-23 11
*136
*137
*138
*139
*140
13
13
13
13
13
20.6
24.0
25.2
39.9
47.6
-36
+54
-11
-53
+49
43
55
10
28
19
*141
*142
*143
*144
*145
13
13
13
14
14
49.6
54.7
55.6
03.9
06.4
-42
+18
-47
-60
-26
28
24
17
24
41
3.0v
2.7v
2.6v
0.6v
3.3v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B2 IV-Vpne
G0 IV
B2.5 IV
B1 III
K2 IIIb
Mu Cen
Eta Boo
Zeta Cen
Beta Cen AB
Pi Hya
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*146
*147
*148
*149
*150
14
14
14
14
14
06.7
15.7
32.1
35.5
39.8
-36 22
+19 11
+38 19
-42 10
-60 51
2.1v
0.0v
3.0v
2.4
0.0v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
K0 IIIb
K1.5 III Fe-0.5
A7 III-IV
B1.5 IVpne
G2 V + K4 V
Theta Cen
Alpha Boo
Gamma Boo
Eta Cen
Alpha Cen A
8
8
8
8
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Menkent
Arcturus
Seginus
*151
*152
*153
*154
*155
14
14
14
14
14
39.8
41.9
42.5
46.6
51.1
-60
-47
-64
+27
-51
51
24
59
04
03
1.3v
2.3v
3.2v
2.4v
2.8v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
K4 V + G2 V
B1.5 III
A7p (Sr) + K5 V
K0 II-III + A0 V
A3 IV
Alpha Cen B
Alpha Lup
Alpha Cir
Epsilon Boo
Alpha Lib A
9
8
9
9
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
A=0.0
*156
*157
*158
*159
*160
14
14
14
15
15
50.6
58.5
59.2
04.1
17.1
+74
-43
-42
-25
-09
10
08
06
18
23
2.1v
2.7v
3.1v
3.3v
2.6v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
K4 III
B2 IV
B2 V
M4 III
B8 Vn
Beta UMi
Beta Lup
Kappa Cen
Sigma Lib
Beta Lib
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*161
*162
*163
*164
*165
15
15
15
15
15
18.9
21.4
20.7
24.9
35.5
-68
-40
+71
+58
+26
41
39
50
58
43
2.9v
3.2v
3.1v
3.3v
2.2v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
A1 IIIn
B1.5 IVn
A2.5 III
K2 III
A0 IV
Gamma TrA
Delta Lup
Gamma UMi
Iota Dra
Gamma CrB
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*166
*167
*168
*169
*170
15
15
15
15
15
35.1
54.3
55.1
58.9
59.5
-41
+06
-63
-26
+25
10
25
26
08
54
2.8v
2.7v
2.9v
2.9v
2.0v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B2 IVn + B2 IVn
K2 IIIb (CN1)
F0 IV
B1 V + B2 V
gM3: + Bep
Alpha Lup AB
Alpha Ser
Beta Tra
Pi Sco A
T CrB
9
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Galt
*171
*172
*173
*174
*175
16
16
16
16
16
00.3
05.5
14.3
18.3
21.2
-22
-19
-03
-04
-25
38
48
43
36
36
2.3v
2.6v
2.7v
3.2v
2.9v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B0.3 IV
B0.5 IV
M0.5 III
G9.5 IIIb Fe-0.5
B1 III + B9 V
Delta Sco AB
Beta Sco AB
Delta Oph
Epsilon Oph
Sigma Sco A
8
9
8
8
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Dschubba
Graffias B=5.0 C=4.9 @ 14"
Yed Prior
Yed Posterior
Alniyat B=8.3
*176
*177
*178
*179
*180
16
16
16
16
16
24.0
29.5
30.2
35.9
37.2
+61
-26
+21
-28
-10
31
26
29
13
34
2.7v
0.9v
2.8v
2.8v
2.6v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
G8 IIIab
M1.5 Iab + B2.5 V
G7 IIIa
B0 V
O9.5 Vn
Eta Dra A
Alpha Sco A
Beta Her
Tau Sco
Zeta Oph
9
9
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
B=8.7
Antares B=5.4
Kornephoros
50
50
40
10
140
210
210
160
30
5
10
200
60
30
Becrux Mimosa
Alioth
Cor Caroli B=5.6 F0 V
Vindamiatrix
Mizar B=3.9
Spica
Alcaid
Mufrid
Hadar
Rigel Kentaurus B=1.3
B=8.6
Izar B=5.1
Zuben Elgenubi
Kocab
Brachium
Zuben Elschemali
Pherkad
Ed Asich
Alphekka
A=3.5 B=3.6
Unukalhai
Fieht
- 46 -
STAR Catalog (continued)
STAR#
RA
DEC
SIZE
11
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
2.8v
1.9v
2.3v
3.0v
3.2v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
G1 IV + G7 V
K2 IIb - IIIa
K2 III
B1.5 IVn
K2 III
Zeta Her AB
Alpha TrA
Epsilon Sco
Mu^1 Sco
Kappa Oph
9
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
3.1v
3.2v
2.4v
3.3v
3.1v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
K4 III
B6 III
A2 Vs + A3 V
F2p V: (Cr)
M5 Ib-II
Zeta Ara
Zeta Dra
Eta Oph AB
Eta Sco
Alpha Her AB
8
8
9
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
3.1v
3.2v
3.3v
2.9v
3.3v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
A1 IVn + ?
K3 IIab
B2 IV
K3 Ib-IIa
B1 Ib
Delta Her
Pi Her
Alpha Oph
Beta Ara
Gamma Ara A
9
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
2.7v
2.8v
3.0v
1.6v
2.1v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B2 IV
G2 Ib-IIa + ?
B2 Vne
B1.5 IV
A5 IIIn
Upsilon Sco
Beta Dra A
Alpha Ara
Lambda Sco
Alpha Oph
8
9
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
*181
*182
*183
*184
*185
16
16
16
16
16
41.3
48.7
50.2
51.9
57.7
+31
-69
-34
-38
+09
36
02
17
03
22
*186
*187
*188
*189
*190
16
17
17
17
17
58.7
08.7
10.4
12.2
14.7
-56
+65
-15
-43
+14
00
43
44
14
23
*191
*192
*193
*194
*195
17
17
17
17
17
15.1
15.1
22.1
25.4
25.5
+24
+36
-25
-55
-56
50
48
00
32
23
*196
*197
*198
*199
*200
17
17
17
17
17
30.8
30.4
31.9
33.7
25.0
-37
+52
-49
-37
+12
17
19
52
07
33
*201
*202
*203
*204
*205
17
17
17
17
17
37.3
42.6
43.5
47.6
49.9
-43
-39
+04
-40
-37
00
02
34
07
02
1.9v
2.4v
2.8v
3.0
3.2v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
F1 II
B1.5 III
K2 III
F2 Ia
K2 III
Theta Sco
Kappa Sco
Beta Oph
Iota^1 Sco
G Sco
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*206
*207
*208
*209
*210
17
17
18
18
18
56.6
59.1
05.8
17.7
21.0
+51
-09
-30
-36
-29
29
46
26
46
50
2.2v
3.3v
3.0v
3.1v
2.7v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
K5 III
K0 III
K0 III
M3.5 IIIab + G8: IV:
K2.5 IIIa
Gamma Dra
Nu Oph
Gamma^2 Sgr
Eta Sgr A
Delta Sgr
8
8
8
9
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*211
*212
*213
*214
*215
18
18
18
18
18
21.3
24.2
28.0
37.0
45.7
-02
-34
-25
+38
-26
54
23
25
47
59
3.3v
1.9v
2.8v
0.0v
3.2v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
K0 III-IV
A0 IIInp (shell)
K1 IIIb
A0 Va
B8.5 III
Eta Ser
Epsilon Sgr
Lambda Sgr
Alpha Lyr
Phi Sgr
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*216
*217
*218
*219
*220
18
18
19
19
19
55.3
58.9
02.7
05.5
07.0
-26
+32
-29
+13
-27
18
41
53
53
39
2.0v
3.2v
2.6v
3.0v
3.3v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B2.5 V
B9 III
A2.5 V + A4: V:
A0 IVnn
K1.5 IIIb
Sigma Sgr
Gamma Lyr
Zeta Sgr AB
Zeta Aql A
Tau Sgr
8
8
9
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Nunki
Sulaphat
Ascella A=3.2 B=3.5
*221
*222
*223
*224
*225
19
19
19
19
19
09.8
12.6
30.8
45.0
46.3
-21
+67
+27
+45
+10
02
39
58
08
37
2.9v
3.1v
3.1v
2.9v
2.7v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
F2 II + ? + ?
G9 III
K3 II + B9.5 V
B9.5 III + F1 V
K3 II
Pi Sgr ABC
Delta Dra
Beta Cyg A
Delta Cyg AB
Gamma Aql
9
8
9
9
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Albaldah A=3.7 B=3.8
Nodus Secundus
Albireo B=5.1
B=6.4
Tarazed
*226
*227
*228
*229
*230
19 50.8
20 11.3
20 21.1
20 22.2
20 26.9
+08
-00
-14
+40
+15
52
50
46
16
05
0.8v
3.2v
3.1v
2.2v
1.9v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
A7 Vn
B9.5 III
K0 II + A5 V:n
F8 Ib
B2.5 V
Alpha Aql
Theta Aql
Beta Cap A
Gamma Cyg
Alpha Pav
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Altair
*231
*232
*233
*234
*235
20
20
20
21
21
37.6
41.5
46.3
13.0
18.6
-47
+45
+33
+30
+62
18
17
58
13
36
3.1v
1.3v
2.5v
3.2v
2.4v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
K0 III (Cn1)
A2 Ia
K0 III
G8 IIIa Ba 0.6
A7 IV-V
Alpha Ind
Alpha Cyg
Epsilon Cyg
Zeta Cyg
Alpha Cep
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
*236
*237
*238
*239
*240
21
21
21
21
21
28.7
31.6
44.2
47.1
54.0
+70
-05
+09
-16
-37
33
35
53
07
22
3.2v
2.9v
2.4v
2.9v
3.0v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
B1 III
G0 Ib
K2 Ib
A3mF2 V:
B8 III
Beta Cep
Beta Aqr
Epsilon Peg
Delta Cap
Gamma Gru
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
10
90
40
40
5
6
350
20
B=5.5
Artia
Aldhibah
Sabik A=3.0 B=3.5
Ras Algethi
Sarin B=8.8
Restaban B=11.5
Shaula
Rasalhague
Sargas
Cebalrai
HR6630
Etamin
Nash
B=8.3
Kaus Australis
Kaus Borealis
Vega
Dabih
Sadr
Peacock
Deneb
Cat
Alderamin
Alphirk
Sadalsuud
Enif '72 flare
- 47 -
STAR Catalog (continued)
STAR#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
*241
*242
*243
*244
*245
22
22
22
22
22
05.8
08.3
18.6
42.7
43.1
-00
-46
-60
-46
+30
19
58
16
52
14
3.0v
1.7v
2.9v
2.1v
2.9v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
G2 Ib
B7 IV
K3 III
M5 III
G8 II + F0 V
Alpha Aqr
Alpha Gru
Alpha Tuc
Beta Gru
Eta Peg
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Sadalmelik
Al Nair
*246
*247
*248
*249
*250
22
22
23
23
23
53.6
57.7
03.8
04.8
39.4
-15
-29
+28
+15
+77
50
38
05
12
38
3.3v
1.2v
2.4v
2.5v
3.2v
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
A3 IV
A3 V
M2 II-III
B9.5 V
K1 III-IV
Delta Aqr
Alpha PsA
Beta Peg
Alpha Peg
Gamma Cep
8
8
8
8
8
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Skat
Fomalhaut
Scheat
Markab
Alrai
*251
*252
*253
*254
*255
00
00
00
00
00
06.1
40.0
42.4
49.9
54.6
+58 26
+21 27
+04 11
+27 42
+19 11
15
66
15
44
5
6.4
5.5
7.8
6.3
6.2
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
6.4:7.2
5.5:8.7
7.8:9.4
6.3:6.3
6.2:6.9
@308
@194
@207
@296
@211
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
61
558
588
683
746
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1980=1.4 @287 107y
1964 Yellow:Blue
1980=1.5 @ 200
1959 p(Yellow:Blue)
1980=0.5 @ 224 400y
*256
*257
*258
*259
*260
00
01
01
01
01
55.0
05.7
09.5
13.7
39.8
+23
+21
+47
+07
-56
38
28
15
35
12
8
299
5
230
113
6.0
5.6
4.6
5.6
5.8
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
6.0:6.4
5.6:5.8
4.6:5.5
5.6:6.6
5.8:5.8
@292
@159
@133
@063
@193
ADS 755
ADS 899
ADS 940
ADS 996
p Eri
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1980=0.6 @ 259
1964 Yellow:pBlue
1980=0.5 @ 140
1972 Yellow:pBlue
1980=11.1 @195
*261
*262
*263
*264
*265
02
01
01
01
02
35.5
53.6
55.9
57.9
02.0
+89
+19
+01
+23
+02
35
18
51
36
46
178
78
10
385
16
2.0
4.6
6.8
4.7
4.2
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
2.0:8.9
4.6:4.7
6.8:6.8
4.7:7.7
4.2:5.2
@216
@000
@057
@047
@273
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
1477
1507
1538
1563
1615
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Polaris North Star
1969 1831=8.6
1980=1.2 @053
1973 Yellow:Blue
pBlue:pGreen
*266
*267
*268
*269
*270
02
02
02
02
02
03.9
12.4
14.0
29.1
37.0
+42
+30
+47
+67
+24
20
18
29
25
39
98
39
11
25
383
2.2
5.3
6.6
4.6
6.6
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
2.2:5.1
5.3:6.9
6.6:7.1
4.6:6.9
6.6:7.4
@063
@071
@274
@232
@276
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
1630
1697
1709
1860
1982
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1967 Orange:Emerald
1959 Yellow:Blue
1980=1.1 @266
1980=2.4 @234
1973 Yellow:pBlue
*271
*272
*273
*274
*275
02
03
03
03
03
43.3
14.1
17.8
35.0
34.5
+03 15
+00 11
+38 38
+60 02
+24 28
28
11
8
14
7
3.6
8.8
7.8
6.8
6.6
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
3.6:6.2
8.8:8.8
7.8:8.3
6.8:7.6
6.6:6.7
@297
@139
@259
@261
@002
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
2080
2416
2446
2612
2616
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1974 Yellow:Ashen
1980=1.0 @144
1980=0.9 @265
1980=1.3 @258
1980=0.6 @006
*276
*277
*278
*279
*280
03
03
04
04
04
50.3
54.3
09.9
07.5
16.0
+25
-02
+80
+38
+31
35
57
42
05
42
4
67
7
16
7
5.8
4.7
5.5
7.4
8.0
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
5.8:6.2
4.7:6.2
5.5:6.3
7.4:8.9
8.0:8.1
@211
@347
@120
@353
@275
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
2799
2850
2963
2995
3082
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1980=0.6
Fixed
1980=0.8
1980=1.4
1980=0.8
*281
*282
*283
*284
*285
04
04
05
05
05
20.4
22.8
07.9
14.5
35.2
+27
+15
+08
-08
+09
21
03
30
12
56
496
14
7
92
43
5.1
7.3
5.8
0.2
3.6
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
5.1:8.5
7.3:8.5
5.8:6.5
0.2:6.7
3.6:5.5
@496
@352
@349
@206
@044
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
3137
3169
3711
3823
4179
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1973 Yel/Ora:Blue
Purple:Blue
1980=0.7 @021
Rigel
1959 Yellow:Purple
*286
*287
*288
*289
*290
05
06
06
06
07
35.3
28.8
46.3
45.3
12.8
-05
-07
+59
-16
+27
23
02
27
42
14
132
99
17
45
13
5.1
4.6
5.4
-1.5
7.2
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
5.4:6.8:6.8
4.6:5.1:5.4
5.4:6.0 @074
-1.5:8.5 @005
7.2:7.2 @316
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
4186
5107
5400
4523
5871
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Trapezium in M42
Fixed White Stars
1980=1.7 @079
1980=10.3 @049
1980=1.3 @320 120y
*291
*292
*293
*294
*295
07
07
08
09
10
30.3
34.6
12.2
21.1
16.3
+49 59
+31 53
+17 39
+38 11
+17 44
8
30
6
11
14
8.8
1.9
5.6
6.5
7.2
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
8.8:8.8
1.9:2.9
5.6:6.0
6.5:6.7
7.2:7.5
@195
@073
@182
@271
@181
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
6117
6175
6650
7307
7704
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1980=0.8 @189
1980=2.2 @095 420y
Yellow:Yellow:Blue
1980=1.1 @254
1980=1.4 @183
*296
*297
*298
*299
*300
10 20.0
11 18.3
11 32.4
12 16.1
12 24.4
44
13
6
115
16
2.2
4.3
5.8
5.9
6.8
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
2.2:3.5
4.3:4.8
5.8:7.1
5.9:9.0
6.8:7.8
@124
@060
@295
@260
@325
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
7724
8119
8197
8489
8539
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1980=4.3 @123
1980=2.9 @105
1980=0.4 @211
1925 Gold:Blue
1980=1.5 @326
+19
+31
+61
+40
+25
51
32
05
39
35
Matar
@207
@109
@003
@270
- 48 -
STAR Catalog (continued)
STAR#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
*301
*302
*303
*304
*305
12
12
12
12
13
26.6
35.1
41.7
53.3
23.9
-63
+18
-01
+21
+54
06
22
28
15
55
47
202
30
8
144
1.6
5.2
3.5
5.1
2.3
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
1.6:2.1
5.2:6.8
3.5:3.5
5.1:7.2
2.3:4.0
@114
@271
@287
@194
@151
Alpha Cru
ADS 8600
ADS 8630
ADS 8695
ADS 8891
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1943 White:White
1963 Yellow:vBlue
1980=3.9 @297 White
1980=0.8 @175
1967
*306
*307
*308
*309
*310
13
14
14
14
14
49.1
15.3
20.4
40.0
41.2
+26
+03
+48
-60
+13
59
08
30
51
44
34
12
13
197
10
7.6
7.8
8.1
0.0
4.5
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
7.6:8.0
7.8:7.9
8.1:8.3
0.0:1.2
4.5:4.6
@167
@239
@105
@214
@160
ADS 9031
ADS 9182
ADS 9229
Alpha Cen
ADS 9343
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1980=3.4 @159
1980=1.1 @252
1980=1.2 @104 White
1980=21.8 @209
1980=1.1 @305 White
*311
*312
*313
*314
*315
14
14
14
15
15
45.0
51.4
51.4
18.4
23.2
+27
+19
+44
+26
+30
04
06
56
50
17
28
70
11
15
10
2.5
4.7
8.4
7.3
5.6
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
2.5:5.0
4.7:6.9
8.4:8.6
7.3:7.4
5.6:5.9
@339
@326
@348
@255
@027
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
9372
9413
9418
9578
9617
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1971 Orange:Green
Orange:Blue
1980=1.1 @346
1980=1.4 @250
1980=0.4 @321
*316
*317
*318
*319
*320
15
15
15
16
16
24.5
34.8
39.4
04.4
14.7
+37
+10
+36
-11
+33
20
32
38
22
51
22
39
63
7
69
7.0
4.1
5.1
4.9
5.6
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
7.0:7.6
4.1:5.2
5.1:6.0
4.9:4.9
5.6:6.6
@012
@179
@305
@044
@235
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
9626
9701
9737
9909
9979
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1980=2.2 @016
1960 Yel-Whi:Ashen
1957
1980=1.2 @021
1980=6.7 @233
*321
*322
*323
*324
*325
16
16
16
16
17
29.4
28.9
30.9
56.5
05.4
-26
+18
+01
+65
+54
26
24
59
02
28
24
17
15
14
19
0.9v
7.7
4.2
7.1
5.7
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
0.9:5.5
7.7:7.8
4.2:5.2
7.1:7.3
5.7:5.7
@276
@129
@022
@069
@025
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
10074
10075
10087
10279
10345
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Antares Red:pGreen
1980=1.4 @136
1980=1.3 @ 013
1980=1.3 @069
1980=1.9 @042
*326
*327
*328
*329
*330
17
17
17
18
18
15.4
14.7
23.7
01.5
03.1
-26 35
+14 24
+37 08
+21 36
-08 11
48
47
40
65
18
5.1
3.2
4.6
5.1
5.2
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
5.1:5.1
3.2:5.4
4.6:5.5
5.1:5.2
5.2:5.9
@151
@107
@316
@258
@280
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
10417
10418
10526
10993
11005
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Orange:Orange
1968 Yellow:Blue
1964
1953 Yellow:pRed
1980=1.9 @277
*331
*332
*333
*334
*335
18
18
18
18
18
05.3
25.0
35.8
44.4
44.4
+02
+27
+16
+39
+39
32
24
58
40
36
15
7
15
26
24
4.2
6.5
6.8
5.0
5.2
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
4.2:6.0
6.5:7.5
6.8:7.0
5.0:6.1
5.2:5.5
@220
@126
@155
@353
@080
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
11046
11334
11483
11635
11635
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Yel-Ora:Ora
1980=0.7 @129
1980=1.6 @161
1980=2.7 @355 White
1980=2.3 @084 White
*336
*337
*338
*339
*340
18
19
19
19
19
57.1
06.4
26.5
30.7
45.5
+32
-37
+27
+27
+33
54
03
19
58
37
10
13
20
344
24
5.4
4.8
8.1
3.2
8.3
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
5.4:7.5
4.8:5.1
8.1:8.4
3.2:5.4
8.3:8.4
@021
@109
@292
@054
@349
ADS 11871
Gamma CrA
ADS 12447
ADS 12540
ADS 12889
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1980=1.1 @051
1980=1.5 @157
1980=1.8 @293
1967 Gold:Blue
1980=2.0 @357
*341
*342
*343
*344
*345
20
20
20
20
21
21.0
46.6
47.5
59.1
02.3
-14 46
+16 08
+36 29
+04 18
+07 11
2050
98
9
10
28
3.1
4.3
4.9
6.0
7.3
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
3.1:6.2
4.3:5.2
4.9:6.1
6.0:6.3
7.3:7.5
@267
@268
@011
@285
@217
Beta
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
Cap
14279
14296
14499
14556
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Yellow:Blue
1967 Gold:Blue-Gre
White:pBlue
1980=1.1 @286
1961
*346
*347
*348
*349
*350
21
22
22
22
23
06.7
28.8
28.2
33.0
34.0
+38
+00
+57
+69
+31
297
19
33
4
4
5.2
4.3
9.8
6.5
5.6
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
STAR
5.2:6.0 @148
4.3:4.5 @207
9.8:11.5 @132
6.5:7.0 @094
5.6:5.7 @280
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
ADS
14636
15971
15972
16057
16836
9
9
9
9
9
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
1980=29.0 @146
pYellow:pBlue
1980=2.6 @176 Reds
1980=0.5 @086
1980=0.4 @267
*351
21 12.3
5.5
STAR VAR 5.3-5.7 F0III
42
15
42
55
20
-88 58
Sigma Oct
8 ST
S-Pole * Sigma Oct
- 49 -
4. M (Messier) Catalog
M#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
3
4
5
05
21
13
16
15
34.5
33.5
42.3
23.7
18.6
+22
-00
+28
-26
+02
01
50
23
31
05
360
774
972
1578
1044
8.4
6.5v
6.4v
5.9v
5.8v
PLAN NEB EMIS SN REM
GLOB CLUS sp=F4
GLOB CLUS sp=F7
GLOB CLUS sp=G0
GLOB CLUS sp=F6
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
1952
7089
5272
6121
5904
B 4 ST
C 2 ST
B 2 ST
B 2 ST
B 2 ST
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M
M
M
M
M
6
7
8
9
10
17
17
18
17
16
40.1
54.0
03.2
19.2
57.1
-32
-34
-24
-18
-04
13
49
23
31
07
900
4800
5400
558
906
4.2v
3.3v
5.2
7.9v
6.6v
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
sp=B4
sp=B5
+ ENEB sp=O5
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
6405
6475
6523
6333
6254
C 1 ST
C 1 ST
B 6 ST
D 2 ST
D 2 ST
M6 1500ly
M7 800ly
M8 Lagoon Nebula 5100ly
M9
M10 20kly
M
M
M
M
M
11
12
13
14
15
18
16
16
17
21
51.1
47.2
41.7
37.6
30.0
-06
-01
+36
-03
+12
16
57
27
17
10
840
870
996
702
738
5.8v
6.6v
5.9v
7.6v
6.4v
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
sp=B8
sp=F8
sp=F6
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
6705
6218
6205
6402
7078
C 1 ST
D 2 ST
B 2 ST
D 2 ST
C 2 ST
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
Very rich 5600ly
24kly
Hercules Globular
M
M
M
M
M
16
17
18
19
20
18
18
18
17
18
18.8
20.8
20.0
02.6
02.3
-13 47
-16 11
-17 08
-26 15
-23 02
2100
2760
540
810
1740
6.0v
6.0v
6.9v
7.2v
6.3v
OPEN CLUS + ENEB sp=O7
DIFF ENEB + OPEN CLUS HII
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS OBLATE
DIFF ENEB + OPEN CLUS HII
CNGC 6611
CNGC 6618
CNGC 6613
CNGC 6273
CNGC 6514
D 6 ST
B 6 ST
D 1 ST
D 2 ST
B 6 ST
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
Eagle Nebula 5500ly
Omega/Swan/Horseshoe
Oblate Shape Globular
Trifid Nebula 3500ly
M
M
M
M
M
21
22
23
24
25
18
18
17
18
18
04.6
36.3
57.0
20.0
33.5
-22
-23
-19
-18
-19
30
56
01
26
14
780
1440
1620
4800
2400
5.9v
5.1v
5.5v
4.7
6.5
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=F7
OPEN CLUS sp=B8
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS SPARSE
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
6531
6656
6494
6630
6634
D1
C2
D1
c1
c1
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
10kly
1400ly
Best with large field
IC 4725 Sparse Cluster
M
M
M
M
M
26
27
28
29
30
18
19
18
20
21
45.4
59.6
24.6
23.9
40.3
-09 24
+22 43
-24 52
+38 32
-23 11
900
910
672
420
660
8.0v
7.6p
6.9v
6.6v
7.5v
OPEN CLUS
PLAN NEB
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
6694
6853
6626
6913
7099
D 1 ST
B 4 ST
D 2 ST
D 1 ST
D2S
M26
M27 Dumbbell Nebula 3500ly
M28
M29
M30
M
M
M
M
M
31
32
33
34
35
00
00
01
02
06
42.8
42.8
33.9
42.0
08.9
+41
+40
+30
+42
+24
17
53
40
47
21
10680
456
3720
2100
1680
3.5
8.2
5.7
5.2v
5.1v
GALAXY Sb I-II
GALAXY E2
GALAXY Sc II-III
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS sp=B5
UGC 454
UGC 452
UGC 1117
CNGC 1039
CNGC 2168
B 5 ST
C 5 ST
C 5 ST
C 1 ST
C 1 ST
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M
M
M
M
M
36
37
38
39
40
05
05
05
21
12
36.2
52.4
28.7
32.2
36.4
+34
+32
+35
+48
+25
08
33
51
26
59
720
1440
1260
1920
972
6.0v
5.6v
6.4v
4.6v
9.6
OPEN CLUS
OPEN CLUS sp=B8
OPEN CLUS sp=B5
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY Sb I: + 3-SYS FNT
CNGC 1960
CNGC 2099
CNGC 1912
CNGC 7092
UGC 7772
C 1 ST
C 1 ST
C 1 ST
D 1 ST
B A ST
M36
M37 4200ly
M38 4600ly
M39
M40 16.2x2.8 Edge-On Lane
M
M
M
M
M
41
42
43
44
45
06
05
05
08
03
47.1
35.3
35.5
40.1
47.1
-20
-05
-05
+19
+24
45
23
16
59
07
2280
3960
1200
5700
7200
4.5v
3.9
5.8
3.1v
1.6
OPEN CLUS sp=B4
DIFF RNEB + ENEB
DIFF RNEB + ENEB
OPEN CLUS sp=A0
OPEN CLUS + RNEB sp=B6
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
CNGC
C 1 ST
A 3 ST
C 3 ST
C 1 ST
c 6 ST
M41
M42
M43
M44
M45
M
M
M
M
M
46
47
48
49
50
07
07
08
12
07
41.9
36.6
13.7
29.8
02.9
-14
-14
-05
+08
-08
49
29
47
00
20
1620
1800
3240
534
960
6.1v
4.4v
5.8v
8.4
5.9v
OPEN CLUS sp=B8
OPEN CLUS sp=B3
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY E4
OPEN CLUS
CNGC 2437
CNGC 2422
CNGC 2548
UGC 7629
CNGC 2323
C
D
D
C
D
M46 5400ly (+CNGC 2438 PN)
M47 1600ly
M48
M49 8.9x7.4
M50
M
M
M
M
M
51
52
53
54
55
13
23
13
18
19
30.0
24.2
13.0
55.2
40.1
+47 11
+61 36
+18 10
-30 28
-30 56
660
780
756
546
1140
8.4
6.9v
7.7v
7.7v
7.0
GALAXY Sc I 2-SYS FACE
OPEN CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS sp=F5
UGC 8493
CNGC 7654
CNGC 5024
CNGC 6715
CNGC 6809
B A ST
D 1 ST
D 2 ST
D 2 ST
D 2 ST
M51 11.0x7.8 Whirlpool Gal
M52
M53
M54
M55 20kly
M
M
M
M
M
56
57
58
59
60
19
18
12
12
12
16.6
53.5
37.8
42.1
43.7
+30
+33
+11
+11
+11
426
150
324
306
432
8.3v
9.7p
9.8
9.8
8.8
GLOB CLUS
PLAN NEB RING-LIKE
GALAXY Sb
GALAXY E3
GALAXY E1
CNGC 6779
CNGC 6720
UGC 7796
UGC 7858
UGC 7898
D 2 ST
B 4 ST
C 5 ST
D 5 ST
D 5 ST
M56
M57
M58
M59
M60
10
02
49
38
33
sp=G1
sp=F2
2287
1976
1982
2632
1457
1
1
1
5
1
ST
ST
ST
T
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
Crab Nebula 4kly
40kly
35kly
14kly
26kly
X-Ray Source 34kly
Andromeda Gal 178x63
Comp of M31 7.6x5.8
Triangulum Gal 62x39
2800ly
2200ly
Orion Nebula Blue+Red
Orion Nebula Extension
Praesepe/Beehive 590ly
Pleiades 410ly
Ring Nebula 5kly
5.4x4.4 Near CNGC 4621
5.1x3.4 Near CNGC 4579
7.2x6.2 Near CNGC 4621
- 50 -
M (Messier) Catalog (continued)
M#
RA
DEC
SIZE
MAG
TYPE & DESCRIPTION
ALT NAME
Q TAGS
COMMON NAME/COMMENTS
M
M
M
M
M
61
62
63
64
65
12 22.0
17 01.3
13 15.8
12 56.7
11 18.9
+04
-30
+42
+21
+13
28
07
02
41
05
360
846
738
558
600
9.7
6.6v
8.6
8.5
9.3
GALAXY Sc I 2-SYS
GLOB CLUS OBLATE
GALAXY Sb+ II
GALAXY SbGALAXY Sb II:
UGC 7420
CNGC 6266
UGC 8334
UGC 8062
UGC 6328
D A ST
D 2 ST
C 5 ST
C 5 ST
C 5 ST
M61
M62
M63
M64
M65
M
M
M
M
M
66
67
68
69
70
11 20.2
08 51.1
12 39.4
18 31.4
18 43.2
+12
+11
-26
-32
-32
59
49
46
21
18
522
1800
720
426
468
9.0
6.9v
8.2v
7.7v
8.1v
GALAXY Sb+ II:
OPEN CLUS sp=F2
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
UGC 6346
CNGC 2682
CNGC 4590
CNGC 6637
CNGC 6681
C
D
D
D
D
5
1
2
2
2
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
M66 8.7x4.4 Near M65
M67 Very old 2700ly
M68
M69
M70
M
M
M
M
M
71
72
73
74
75
19
20
20
01
20
53.7
53.5
59.0
36.7
06.2
+18
-12
-12
+15
-21
47
33
37
47
55
432
354
168
612
360
8.3v
9.4v
8.9p
9.2
8.6v
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY Sc I
GLOB CLUS
CNGC 6838
CNGC 6981
CNGC 6994
UGC 1149
CNGC 6864
D
D
D
D
D
2
2
1
5
2
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
M71
M72
M73
M74 10.2x9.5
M75
M
M
M
M
M
76
77
78
79
80
01
02
05
05
16
42.0
42.7
46.8
24.2
17.1
+51
-00
+00
-24
-23
34
01
03
31
00
290
414
480
522
534
12.2
8.8
11.3
8.0v
7.2v
PLAN NEB PART OF 0651
GALAXY Sbp SEYFERT
DIFF RNEB
GLOB CLUS
GLOB CLUS
CNGC 0650
UGC 2188
CNGC 2068
CNGC 1904
CNGC 6093
C
D
C
D
D
4
5
3
2
2
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
M76 Little Dumbbell Nebula
M77 6.9x5.9 Seyfert Galaxy
M78 Blue 1500ly
M79
M80
M
M
M
M
M
81
82
83
84
85
09
09
13
12
12
55.7
55.9
37.1
25.1
25.5
+69 04
+69 41
-29 51
+12 53
+18 11
1542
672
672
300
426
6.9
8.4
8.2
9.3
9.2
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
Sb I-II
P EDGE-ON
Sc I-II FACE-ON
E1
Ep 2-SYS
CNGC 3031
UGC 5322
CNGC 5236
UGC 7494
UGC 7508
C 5 ST
C 5 ST
B 5 ST
C 5 ST
C A ST
M81
M82
M83
M84
M85
25.7x14.1 Near M82
11.2x4.6 Exploding
11.2x10.2
5.0x4.4 Near M86
7.1x5.2
M
M
M
M
M
86
87
88
89
90
12
12
12
12
12
26.3
30.9
32.1
35.7
36.9
+12
+12
+14
+12
+13
56
23
25
33
09
444
432
414
252
570
9.2
8.6
9.5
9.8
9.5
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
GALAXY
E3
E1 + E0 2-SYS
Sb+ I MULTI-ARM
E0
Sb+
UGC
UGC
UGC
UGC
UGC
C 5 ST
D A ST
D 5 ST
D 5 ST
C 5 ST
M86
M87
M88
M89
M90
7.4x5.5
7.2x6.8 + CNGC 4471
6.9x3.9
4.2x4.2
9.5x4.7
M
M
M
M
M
91
92
93
94
95
12
17
07
12
10
35.5
17.2
44.6
50.9
43.9
+14
+43
-23
+41
+11
29
09
52
08
42
324
672
1320
660
444
10.2
6.5v
6.2v
8.2
9.7
GALAXY SBb + Sc 2-SYS
GLOB CLUS sp=F1
OPEN CLUS + DNEB
GALAXY Sb-p II:
GALAXY S(B)b II
UGC 7753
CNGC 6341
CNGC 2447
UGC 7996
UGC 5850
D A ST
D 2 ST
D 6 ST
C 5 ST
C 5 ST
M91
M92
M93
M94
M95
5.4x4.4 Near CNGC 4571
X-Ray Source 26kly
Includes dark nebula
11.0x9.1
7.4x5.1 Near M96
M 96
M 97
M 98
M 99
M100
10 46.7
11 14.8
12 13.9
12 18.9
12 23.0
+11
+55
+14
+14
+15
49
02
54
25
49
426
194
570
324
414
9.2
12.0p
10.1
9.8
9.4
GALAXY Sbp
PLAN NEB
GALAXY Sb I-II: 3-SYS
GALAXY Sc I NEAR FACE-ON
GALAXY Sc I FACE-ON
UGC 5882
CNGC 3587
UGC 7231
UGC 7345
UGC 7450
C 5 ST
C 4 ST
D A ST
D 5 ST
D 5 ST
M96 7.1x5.1 Near M95
M97 Owl Nebula 12kly
M98 9.5x3.2
M99 5.4x4.8
M100 6.9x6.2 Brite Nucleus
M101
M102
M103
M104
M105
14
15
01
12
10
03.3
06.5
33.3
39.9
47.8
+54
+55
+60
-11
+12
21
45
43
38
35
1614
312
360
534
270
7.7
10.0
7.4v
8.3
9.3
GALAXY Sc I FACE-ON
GALAXY E6p 2-SYS
OPEN CLUS
GALAXY SbGALAXY E1 2-SYS
UGC 8981
UGC 9723
CNGC 0581
CNGC 4594
UGC 5902
C5S
D A ST
D 1 ST
C 5 ST
C A ST
M101
M102
M103
M104
M105
M106
M107
M108
M109
M110
12 19.0
16 32.5
11 11.6
11 57.6
00 40.4
+47
-13
+55
+53
+41
18
02
41
22
42
1092
600
498
456
1044
8.3
8.1v
10.1
9.8
8.0
GALAXY Sb+p
GLOB CLUS
GALAXY Sc NEAR EDGE-ON
GALAXY S(B)b+ I
GALAXY E6:
UGC 7353
CNGC 6171
UGC 6225
UGC 6937
UGC 426
C
D
C
D
C
M106
M107
M108
M109
M110
7532
7654
7675
7760
7786
5
2
5
5
5
ST
ST
ST
ST
ST
6.0x5.5 Face-On
Non-symmetrical
12.3x7.6 Sunflower Gal
9.3x5.4 Black Eye Gal
10.0x3.3 Near M66
26.9x26.3 Pinwheel
5.2x2.3
8.9x4.1 “Sombrero”
4.5x4.0
18.2x7.9
8.3x2.5 Near M97
7.6x4.9
Comp of M31 17.4x9.8
- 51 -
APPENDIX E:
MAINTAINING YOUR LX200
1. Keeping Your Telescope Clean
Prevention is the best recommendation that a telescope owner
can follow to keep astronomical equipment in top working
order. Proper measures taken during observation and when
storing equipment between observing runs can add many
years of trouble free use.
Dust and moisture are the two main enemies to your
instrument. When observing, it is advisable to use a proper
fitting dew shield. The dew shield not only prevents dew from
forming, and dust from settling on the corrector plate lens, it
prevents stray light from reducing image contrast.
Although dew shields go a long way to prevent moisture buildup, there can be times when the telescope optics will have a
uniform coating of moist dew. This is not particularly harmful, as
long as the instrument is allowed to let the dew evaporate. This
can be done with a hair dryer, or just setting up the telescope
indoors with the dust covers removed. It is also advisable that
you let the foam lined case for the LX200 dry out indoors for a
day if the night was moist. Packing your telescope away in a
moist case can result in giving it a steam bath later.
CAUTION: Anytime the LX200 is being stored or
transported, be sure to release the R.A. and Dec.
locks, to prevent serious damage to the drive gears.
CAUTION: Never attempt to wipe down optics that are
covered with dew. Dust and dirt may be trapped with
the collected dew, and upon wiping the optics you
may scratch them. After the dew has evaporated you
will most likely find them in fine condition for the next
observing session.
If you live in a very moist climate, you may find it necessary to
use silica desiccant stored in the telescope’s case to ward off
moisture and the possibility of fungus growing on and within the
coatings of the optics. Replace the desiccant as often as
necessary.
Those living in coastal areas or tropic zones should also cover
the electronic ports on the power panel and the keypad with
gaffers tape to reduce corrosion on the metal contacts. Apply a
dab of a water displacement solution (i.e. WD-40) with a small
brush on all interior metal contacts and the input cord metal
contacts. The keypad and all separate accessories should be
kept in sealable plastic bags with silica desiccant.
A thick layer of dust will attract and absorb moisture on all
exposed surfaces. Left unattended, it can cause damaging
corrosion. To keep dust at bay when observing, the telescope
can be set up on a small section of indoor/outdoor carpet. If you
are observing for more than one night in a row, the telescope
can be left set up but covered with a large plastic bag (such as
the one supplied with the telescope). The rear cell opening of
the LX200 can also be sealed off to the elements by threading
on the optional accessory Skylight 1A Dust Seal. Eyepieces,
diagonals, and other accessories are best kept in plastic bags
and stored in cases, such as the Meade #50 Accessory Case.
All of the non optical surfaces of the LX200 should be cleaned
routinely with a soft rag and alcohol to prevent corrosion. The
cast metal surfaces and the individual exposed screws can also
be kept looking new and corrosion free by wiping them down
with a water displacement solution. Take care not to smear the
solution onto any optical surface, and to wipe up any excess
solution with a clean dry cloth. The painted tube can be
polished with a liquid car polish and a soft rag.
Surprisingly, the most common telescope maintenance
error is cleaning the optics too often. A little dust on any of
the optical surfaces causes virtually zero degradation of optical
performance. It should be of no concern whatsoever to see
some small particles on the inside or outside of telescope
optics. Should the optics get more dust on them than you would
care for, simply use a photographic grade camel hair brush with
very gentle strokes. You can also blow off dust with an ear
syringe (available from a local pharmacy).
There is a point, however, when the optics must be cleaned.
This is when you can easily tell that there is a thin layer of fine
particulates that make the optics look very slightly hazy. To
clean the optics we must suggest that you make your own lens
cleaning solutions, since it is impossible to know all of the
ingredients used in commercial lens cleaners. Pure isopropyl
alcohol (90% or better) will clean most residual film build-up on
optical surfaces (and metal surfaces too).
Organic materials (e.g., fingerprints) on the front lens may be
removed with a solution of 3 parts distilled water to 1 part
isopropyl alcohol. A single drop of biodegradable dishwashing
soap may be added per pint of solution. Use soft, white facial
tissues and make short, gentle strokes. Change tissues often.
CAUTION: Do not use scented, colored, or lotioned
tissues or damage could result to the optics.
Sprayer bottles are a convenient dispenser of lens cleaning
solutions onto the tissues. Use soft, white facial tissues and
make short, gentle strokes. Change tissues often. If the optics
are small (such as viewfinders or eyepieces), the tissue can be
rolled to the appropriate thickness and then broken in half to
create two cleaning wands. It is advised that you avoid many of
the so-called lens cleaning papers (many which contain
fiberglass), lens cloths, or chamois.
Before attempting to clean an optical surface with a liquid
solution, it is very important that as much dust as possible is
removed by using forced air and/or gentle strokes with a
photographic grade camel hair brush. The forced air can come
from a rubber ear syringe, or canned compressed air from a
photographic supply store. Be sure to hold the canned air in a
vertical position and try spraying compressed air on your hand
before aiming at the optics to see if any of the propellant (solid
material) comes out. Propellant is very difficult to remove from
optics, so take care not to tip the can when using it. If you have
access to a compressor hose, be sure that it is filtered to
prevent oil from being sprayed on the optics.
Once you are confident that you have removed most of the dust
and large particles, begin cleaning with the mixture described
above. Pour or spray enough solution onto a pillow or wand of
tissue until it is quite wet. If you are cleaning a corrector plate,
use radial strokes with a smooth pillow of tissue, starting from
the center out, using no pressure. If you are cleaning small
optical surfaces, use the rolled wands of tissue starting from
the edges then spiraling in to the center, again using no
pressure. Never pour or spray the solution onto the corrector
plate or eyepieces themselves, as the liquid may go behind or
in between lenses, where it is difficult or impossible to reach.
Never attempt to disassemble an eyepiece to clean the inner
elements, as you will certainly not be able to properly center
and re-assemble the optical train.
Use dry tissue to make the final clean up, again using no
pressure. If there is still some sort of residue, repeat the
procedure using the three part formula described above, again
using the same cleaning techniques.
The inside surface of the corrector plate and secondary mirror
may at some point become dirty due to particles falling inside
the tube when removing or replacing the rear dust cover or
threading on accessories. To reduce the chance of interior
contamination, the Meade Skylight 1A Dust Seal is very
effective. If the Dust Seal is not used, it helps to have the rear
cell pointed downward when replacing the rear dust cover or
attaching accessories.
Another more serious, but not damaging problem is the
possibility of a hazy (usually uneven) film building up on the
inside of the corrector plate. This can be caused by
- 52 environmental pollutants, or temperature changes reacting with
the interior paint, causing outgassing or water condensation, or
combinations thereof.
It is possible to clean the interior of the optical system yourself
or to have it done professionally. In the case of the former, take
great care in handling the optics. Any impact or rough handling
can damage the surfaces, which may require complete optical
replacement at Meade Instruments at substantial cost. Meade
Instruments assumes no liability for damage incurred to the
telescope by the customer.
The cleaning techniques described above are used while
cleaning the interior of the optical system, with one exception:
Do not apply cleaning solutions to the front surface
mirrored optics. Only use the soft camel hair brush and the
suggested ear syringe for removing particles. The corrector
plate can be cleaned in the normal manner.
To remove the corrector plate, follow the instructions below:
a.
Remove the six (8” and 12” models) or the eight (10”
model) stainless steel screws that hold the corrector plate
retaining ring with the raised white lettering in place. This
should be done with the Drive Base placed flat on a work
bench, and the optical tube assembly pointed up at a 45degree angle with the declination lock secure to prevent
accidental dislodging of the corrector plate.
b.
Remove the plastic retaining ring and locate the two white
alignment marks, one at the edge of the corrector plate
lens and one beside it on the black metal front cell. These
two marks line up and serve as the precise rotational
position of the corrector plate in the optical train. If no
marks exist, make them yourself with a small paintbrush
and some white paint, so that when you return the
corrector plate to the front cell you are putting it back in
the same position that you took it off.
c.
d.
e.
Remove the corrector plate from the telescope, holding it
by the plastic central secondary housing. Gently flip it over
so that the secondary mirror is facing you, then reinsert
the corrector plate back into the front cell. This will allow
you full access to clean the interior optical surfaces
without touching them with your fingers.
2. Collimation of the Optical System
The optical collimation (alignment) of any astronomical
telescope used for serious purposes is important, but in cases
of the Schmidt-Cassegrain design of the 8”, 10”, and 12”
LX200, such collimation is absolutely essential for good
performance. Take special care to read and understand this
section well so that your LX200 will give you the best optical
performance.
NOTE: The 7” LX200 does not require collimation.
For final optical tests, every Meade Schmidt-Cassegrain is
precisely collimated at the factory before shipment. Our
company is well aware that through shipment and normal
handling, the optical alignment can be degraded. The design of
the optical support system make the method of collimation easy
to do. Even the uninitiated can make an alignment of the optics
to the same high precision that is performed at the Meade
Instruments Optical Laboratories.
To check the collimation of your LX200, center a bright star that
is overhead, or use a reflected “hot spot” of reflected sunlight
from a chrome car bumper or a telephone pole insulator, with
the supplied 26mm eyepiece. To make a correct evaluation of
the alignment it helps if the telescope has been allowed to
either cool down or warm up to the ambient temperature where
the instrument is set up. Temperature differences between the
optics and the outside air can cause distortion in the images.
With the star or hot spot centered, de-focus the image. You will
notice that the out of focus star image looks like a ring of light
(the dark center of the ring is the shadow of the secondary
mirror). Turn the focus knob until the ring of light fills about 1/8th
of the eyepiece field. Take note that if you keep de-focusing the
star past about 1/8th of a field, that the ring will look perfectly
concentric (even on all sides) even if the optics are out of
alignment, thus preventing you from seeing any misalignments.
If the ring of light does not seem to be even on all sides, or if
the dark center seems to be offset in the in the ring of light,
follow the method below:
a.
When cleaning is complete, replace the corrector plate in
it’s original position, carefully lining up the rotational index
marks described in paragraph b, above. Then replace the
retainer. Partially thread in all of the stainless steel
screws, then, one at a time, snug the screws down to
prevent the corrector plate from rotating in the front cell.
Take care not to overtighten the screws as it will stress the
corrector plate lens.
WARNING: DO NOT FORCE THE 3 COLLIMATION
SCREWS PAST THEIR NORMAL TRAVEL AND DO NOT
LOOSEN THEM MORE THAN 2 FULL TURNS
(COUNTER-CLOCKWISE DIRECTION), OR THE
SECONDARY MIRROR MAY COME LOOSE FROM ITS
SUPPORT. YOU WILL FIND THAT THE ADJUSTMENTS
ARE VERY SENSITIVE: USUALLY, ONLY TURNING A
COLLIMATION SCREW 1/2 A TURN WILL GIVE
DRAMATIC RESULTS.
A final check of the optical system is to inspect for proper
collimation (alignment) of the optics.
b.
While looking at the de-focused star image and noticing
which direction the darker shadow is offset in the ring of
light or noticing which part of the ring is the thinnest
(1, Fig. 27), place your index finger in front of the
telescope so that it touches one of the collimation set
screws. You will see the shadow of your finger in the ring
of light. Move your finger (or an assistants finger) around
the edge of the black plastic secondary mirror support
until you see the shadow of the finger crossing the
thinnest part of the ring of light. At this point, look at the
front of the telescope where your (or your assistants)
finger is aiming. It will either be pointing directly at a set
screw, or it will be between two set screws aiming at the
set screw on the far side of the black plastic secondary
mirror support. This is the set screw that you will adjust.
c.
Using the telescope’s slow motion controls, move the defocused image to the edge of the eyepiece field of view
(2, Fig. 27), in the same direction as the darker shadow is
offset in the ring of light.
1
2
3
Fig. 26: Collimation of the Optical System. (1), (2), (3) Set
screws for adjusting collimation.
To make collimation easy, the only adjustments possible
on the 8”, 10”, and 12” LX200 come from the three set
screws (1, 2, and 3, Fig.26) located at the edge of the
outer surface of the secondary mirror housing.
- 53 -
(1)
(2)
(3)
Fig. 27: De-focused Star Images.
d.
Turn the set screw that you found with the pointing
exercise while looking in the eyepiece. You will notice that
the star image will move across the field. If while turning,
the out-of-focus star image flies out of the eyepiece field,
then you are turning the screw the wrong way. Turn the
opposite direction and bring the image to the center of the
field.
e.
If while turning, you feel the screw get very loose, tighten
the other two screws by even amounts. If while turning,
the set screw gets too tight, unthread the other two by
even amounts.
f.
When you bring the image to center (3, Fig. 27), carefully
examine the evenness of the ring of light (concentricity). If
you find that the dark center is still off in the same
direction, continue to make the adjustment in the original
turning direction. If it is now off in the opposite direction,
you have turned too far and you need to turn in the
opposite direction. Always double check the image in the
center of the field of the eyepiece.
g.
You may find after your initial adjustment that the dark
center is off in a new direction (e.g., instead of side-toside, it is off in an up-and-down direction). If this is the
case follow steps b through f as described above to find
the new adjustment screw.
h.
Now try a higher power (e.g., 9mm or less) eyepiece and
repeat the above tests. Any lack of collimation at this point
will require only very slight adjustments of the 3 set
screws. You now have a good collimation.
i.
As a final check on alignment, examine the star image infocus with the higher power eyepiece as suggested
above, under good seeing conditions (e.g., steady
atmospheric conditions). The star point should appear as
a small central dot (the so-called “Airy disc”) with a
diffraction ring surrounding it. To give a final precision
collimation, make extremely slight adjustments of the 3
set screws, if necessary, to center the Airy disc in the
diffraction ring. You now have the best alignment of the
optics possible.
3. Right Ascension Lock
After a period of time, it is possible that the R.A. lock (7, Fig. 1)
of the LX200 will not tighten sufficiently due to internal wear of
the clutch mechanism. In such an event, remove the R.A. lock
lever using one of the hex wrenches supplied with the
telescope. Then, with a pair of pliers, tighten the shaft
protruding outward from the drive base until you cannot easily
rotate the fork arm in R.A. (Take care in this operation not to
damage the cosmetic finish of your LX200). Replace the R.A.
lock lever so that the handle points straight out from the crossbar connecting the fork arm.
4. Behind the Power Panel
The LX200 power panel houses the back-up replaceable
battery (1, Fig. 28) for the clock and calendar and a replaceable
standard 1.0 amp slow-blow fuse (2, Fig. 28). The long-life
lithium battery (Panasonic CR2032 3 vDC or Duracell
DL2032B) is stored behind the front panel of the Drive Base.
The battery does have to be changed every few years, and is
done by unthreading the four phillips-head screws that secure
the Front Panel to the Drive Base. Then with a thin flat-head
screw driver, lift the small coin-size battery out of its holder. The
new battery simply slides in place.
The 1.0 amp slow-blow fuse will sacrifice itself to protect the
LX200 electronics in the event that the telescope is prevented
from completing a GO TO function (e.g., the tube runs into
something that keeps it from slewing).
1
2
Fig. 28: Reverse Side of Power Panel. (1) Fuse; (2) Battery.
5. Factory Servicing and Repairs
Meade LX200 models have been designed and manufactured
for years of trouble-free operation and repairs should rarely be
necessary. If a problem does occur, first write or call our
Customer Service Department. Do not return the telescope
until you have communicated with us in this way, since the
great majority of problems can be handled without the return of
the telescope to us. However, should the occasion arise that
the instrument requires factory servicing, a Meade Instruments
Customer Service Representative will issue a Return Goods
Authorization (RGA) number and give you full instructions on
how to use it. Product returned without the RGA number may
greatly delay any servicing or repairs. When telephoning or
writing, please explain the exact nature of the problem so that
we may offer a prompt remedial procedure. Be sure to include
your full name, address, phone and fax numbers where you
can be reached.
Should you live outside of the United States, contact your
Authorized Meade Distributor.
You can reach the Meade Instruments Customer Service
Department either by mail, phone, or fax at: Meade Instruments
Corporation, 6001 Oak Canyon, Irvine, CA 92620-4205,
telephone (949) 451-1450, or fax (949) 451-1460. Outside of
the U.S.A., dial your International Access Code, then 1, then
the ten digit number above in the 949 area code. Customer
Service hours are 8:30 AM to 4:30 PM, Pacific Time, Monday
through Friday.
- 54 -
APPENDIX F:
LX200 PERSONAL COMPUTER CONTROL
635241
Remote operation of a computerized telescope has only been
a fanciful dream for most amateur astronomers. The realization
of fully controlling a telescope through a personal computer has
previously been a staggering proposition involving high
monetary cost and expert knowledge of software and
hardware.
The LX200’s internal software supports the RS-232 interface,
requiring only a serial communication program such as
Procomm. With a serial communication program, you can use
the individual commands from the LX200 Command Set to
simulate keypad control functions of the LX200. Every LX200
command and mode is available to explore the Object Library,
to adjust slewing speeds, or to adjust focus with the optional
#1206 Electric Focuser, just to name a few, with a simple RS232 line connection to virtually any computer.
If you are not a professional programmer, but wish to explore
remote operation of the LX200 with your computer, there are
after-market software programs available specifically for the
LX200, including AstroSearch from Meade Instruments Corp.
What follows is a schematic for constructing your own RS-232
cable, a program to test the RS-232 communication line called
LX200 TEST, the LX200 Command Set, and LX200 DEMO,
which is a program that you can enter into your computer to
access the Object Library, slew to the object, and center the
image.
1. RS-232 Cable
The input hardware uses a standard 6-line telephone jack
connector, pre-attached to a 6-conductor flat line telephone
style cable (of any length, up to 100’ and perhaps even more,
depending on the gauge of the cable). You will also need either
a 9-pin or 25-pin RS-232 connector, whichever your computer
uses for the serial port. All of the above items are available at
most electronics hardware stores.
Fig. 29 shows the LX200 pinouts for the 6-line telephone
connector. The table below shows standard IBM compatible
DB-9 and DB-25 serial port pin outs,** and how they should be
connected to the LX200 6-line modular connector.
NOTE: Only 3 wires are required.
2. LX200 Test Program
Once you have the RS-232 cable constructed you will want to
test the cable. Below is a simple program called “LX200 TEST”
that is written in GW Basic programming language and will
work with virtually any IBM compatible computer. LX200 TEST
is an effective program to fully check the RS-232 line
communications from your personal computer to the LX200,
allowing you to concentrate on de-bugging your RS-232 cable.
To enter the following program, first load BASIC or GWBASIC
(whichever your computer system uses), then type in the
following program. When complete, be sure to save the
program as “LX200TST.BAS.”
Telescope
Panel
Connector
6
3
5
2
4
1
Fig. 29: LX200 Modular Connector.
10 CLS
20 DEFINT A-X
30 OPEN "COM1:9600,N,8,1,CD0,CS0,DS0,RS," FOR RANDOM
AS #1
50 key1$ = INKEY$: IF key1$ = "" THEN GO TO 50
60 REM KEY1S
70 IF key1$ = CHR$(119) THEN GOSUB 200: REM "w" key
80 IF key1$ = CHR$(101) THEN GOSUB 200: REM "e" key
90 IF key1$ = CHR$(110) THEN GOSUB 200: REM "n" key
100 IF key1$ = CHR$(115) THEN GOSUB 200: REM "s" key
105 IF key1$ = "x" THEN END: REM To exit test.
110 GO TO 50
120 END
200 REM directions
210 REM west
220 IF key1$ = "w" THEN a$ = "#:Mw#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO west
230 REM east
240 IF key1$ = "e" THEN a$ = "#:Me#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO east
250 REM north
260 IF key1$ = "n" THEN a$ = "#:Mn#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO north
270 REM south:
280 IF key1$ = "s" THEN a$ = "#:Ms#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO south
290 key1$ = INKEY$:
300 IF key1$ = CHR$(32) THEN GO TO 400 ELSE GO TO 200
400 REM This stops motion (by hitting SPACE bar).
410 B$ = "#:Qe#": PRINT #1, B$
420 B$ = "#:Qw#": PRINT #1, B$
430 B$ = "#:Qn#": PRINT #1, B$
440 B$ = "#:Qs#": PRINT #1, B$
450 RETURN
460 END
To use the above program, connect the completed cable to
your PC serial port and to the LX200 RS-232 Port. Load BASIC
(or GWBASIC), if not already loaded, and run
“LX200TST.BAS.” Nothing will appear on the computer screen.
Press any one of the N, S, E, or W (lower case) keys on your
LX200 RS-232 CONNECTOR PIN OUT CODE LEGEND
6 WIRE MODULAR
CONNECTOR
DESCRIPTION
TO DB-9 CONNECTOR
PIN#***
TO DB-25
CONNECTOR PIN#***
#1
+12 VOLTS DC
NOT USED
NOT USED
#2
MISC. SERIAL OUT
NOT USED
NOT USED
#3
PC TRANSMIT DATA
#3
#2
#4
GROUND
#5
#7
#5
PC RECEIVE DATA
#2
#3
#6
MISC. SERIAL IN
NOT USED
NOT USED
- 55 PC keyboard, this will move the LX200 North, South, East, or
West respectively. Press the space bar on the PC keyboard to
stop. Press X to exit the program.
If the LX200 does not respond to the N, S, E, or W keys, be
sure the CAPSLOCK is OFF. If it still does not work, check the
PC serial port pinouts of your computer to be sure they are
wired correctly to the LX200 6-line connector.
DD*
Example
56*
Range
00* - 90*
“Higher” parameter (degrees).
TT.T
Example
59.2
Range
56.4 - 60.1
Tracking “frequency.”
With a successful check-out of the PC link with the LX200 using
LX200 TEST, you are now ready to write your own software
program using the LX200 Command Set, or to use the sample
program called “DEMO” that is written in Quick Basic software
language.
<obj> info
Example
CNGC1976 SU DNEBMAG 3.9 SZ 66.0'
Range
n/a
Object information.
3. LX200 Command Set
Ok
Intended for professional programmers, the LX200 Command
Set is used to write custom software for remote operation of the
telescope with a PC. Each command is listed in a section
appropriate to its type. Each entry in the command list includes
the command name, any parameters, any return values, and a
description. The parameters and the return data are shown in
a manner that indicates their format. These formats are listed
below along with examples of how the data might actually
appear, the legal range of values, and a short description.
Below is a detailed description:
a. Command Set Formats
HH:MM.T
Example
05:47.4
Range
00:00.0 - 23:59.9
Hours, minutes, and tenths of minutes.
sDD*MM
Example
+45*59
Range
-90*00 - +90*00
Signed degrees and minutes (the '*' represents
ASCII 223 which appears on the handbox as a
degree symbol).
DDD*MM
Example
254*09
Range
000*00 - 359*59
Unsigned degrees and minutes.
HH:MM:SS
Example
13:15:36
Range
00:00:00 - 23:59:59
Hours, minutes, and seconds.
MM/DD/YY
Example
02/06/92
Range
01/01/00 - 12/31/99 (see description)
Month, day, and year. The two digit year
indicates the following:
92-99 = 1992-1999
00-91 = 2000-2091
sHH
Example
-5
Range
-24 - +24
Signed hour offset.
NNNN
Example
3456
Range
0000 - 9999
Four digit object number.
Example
1
Range
0 or 1
Status value returned after setting values. If the value
is legal 1 is returned, otherwise 0 is returned.
b. General Telescope Information
Command
:GR#
Returns
+HH:MM.T#
Gets the current Right Ascension.
Command
:GD#
Returns
sDD*MM#
Gets the current Declination.
Command
:GA#
Returns
sDD*MM#
Gets the current Altitude.
Command
:GZ#
Returns
DDD*MM#
Gets the current Azimuth.
Command
:GS#
Returns
HH:MM:SS#
Gets the current sidereal time.
Command
:SS HH:MM:SS#
Returns
Ok
Sets the sidereal time.
Command
:GL#
:Ga#
Returns
HH:MM:SS#
Gets the local time either in 24 hour (GL) or 12 hour (Ga)
format.
Command
:SL HH:MM:SS#
Returns
Ok
Sets the local time. NOTE: The parameter should always
be in 24 hour format.
Command
:GC#
Returns
MM/DD/YY#
Gets the calendar date.
Command
:SC MM/DD/YY#
Returns
Ok (see description)
Sets the calendar date. NOTE: After the Ok, if the date is
valid, two strings will be sent. The first will contain the
message “Updating planetary data,” the second (sent
after the planetary calculations) will contain only blanks.
Both strings will be terminated by the “#” symbol.
sMM.M
Example
02.4
Range
05.5 - 20.0
Signed magnitude value.
Command
:Gt#
Returns
sDD*MM#
Gets the latitude of the currently selected site.
NNN
Command
:St sDD*MM#
Returns
Ok
Sets the latitude of the currently selected site.
Example
134
Range
000 - 200
Three digit object size (minutes).
Command
:Gg#
Returns
DDD*MM#
Gets the longitude of the currently selected site.
- 56 Command
:Sg DDD*MM#
Returns
Ok
Sets the longitude of the currently selected site.
Command
:GG#
Returns
sHH#
Gets the offset from Greenwich Mean Time.
Command
:SG sHH#
Returns
Ok
Sets the offset from Greenwich Mean Time.
Command
:W1#
:W2#
:W3#
:W4#
Returns
Nothing
Sets the current site number.
c. Telescope Motion
Command
:Mn#
:Ms#
:Me#
:Mw#
Returns
Nothing
Starts motion in the specified direction at the current rate.
Command
:MS#
Returns
0, 1, 2, or 4 (see description)
Slews telescope to current object coordinates. 0 is
returned if the telescope can complete the slew, 1 is
returned if the object is below the horizon, 2 is returned if
the object is below the “higher” limit, and 4 is returned if
the object is above the lower limit. If 1, 2, or 4 is returned,
a string containing an appropriate message is also
returned.
commands except “:Q#” and “:h?#” are disabled during
the search.
Command
:hP#
Returns
Nothing
Slews the telescope to the home position.
Command
:h?#
Returns
0, 1, or 2
Returns the home status: 0 if home search failed or not
yet attempted, 1 if home position found, or 2 if a home
search is in progress.
e. Library/Objects
Command
:Gr#
Returns
HH:MM.T#
Gets object right ascension.
Command
:Sr HH:MM.T#
Returns
Ok
Sets object right ascension.
Command
:Gd#
Returns
sDD*MM#
Gets object declination.
Command
:Sd sDD*MM#
Returns
Ok
Sets object declination.
Command
:Sa sDD*MM#
Returns
Ok
Sets object altitude (for MA command).
Command
:Sz DDD*MM#
Returns
Ok
Sets object azimuth (for MA command).
Command
:MA#
Returns
0
Slews telescope to object alt-az coordinates (set with the
Sa and Sz commands). This command only works in the
LAND and ALTAZ modes.
Command
:CM#
Returns
(see description)
Sync. Matches current telescope coordinates to the
object coordinates and sends a string indicating which
object’s coordinates were used.
Command
Command
:Gy#
Returns
GPDCO#
Gets the “type” string for the FIND operation. A capital
letter means that the corresponding type is selected while
a lower case letter indicates it is not.
:Qn#
:Qs#
:Qe#
:Qw#
Returns
Nothing
Stops motion in the specified direction. Also stops the
telescope if a slew to an object is in progress.
Command
:Q#
Returns
Nothing
Stops a slew to an object.
Command
:RG#
:RC#
:RM#
:RS#
Returns
Nothing
Sets the motion rate to guide (RG), center (RC), find (RM),
or slew (RS).
Command
:Sw N#
Returns
Ok
Sets the maximum slew rate to “N” degrees per second
where N is 2 through 4.
d. Home Position
Command
:hS#
Returns
Nothing
Starts a home position search and saves the telescope
position. NOTE: All commands except “:Q#” and “:h?#”
are disabled during the search.
Command
:hF#
Returns
Nothing
Starts a home position search and sets the telescope
position according to the saved values. NOTE: All
Command
:Sy GPDCO#
Returns
Ok
Sets the “type” string for the FIND operation.
Command
:Gq#
Returns
SU#, EX#, VG#, GD#, FR#, PR#, or VP#
Gets the current minimum quality for the FIND operation.
Command
:Sq#
Returns
Nothing
Steps to the next minimum quality for the FIND operation.
Command
:Gh#
Returns
DD*#
Gets the current “higher” limit.\
Command
:Sh DD#
Returns
Ok
Sets the current “higher” limit.
Command
:Go#
Returns
DD*#
Gets the current “lower” limit.
Command
:So DD*#
Returns
Ok
Sets the current “lower” limit.
Command
Returns
:Gb#
:Gf#
sMM.M#
- 57 Gets the brighter (Gb) or fainter (Gf) magnitude limit for
the FIND operation.
Command
:Sb sMM.M#
:Sf sMM.M#
Returns
Ok
Sets the brighter (Sb) or fainter (Sf) magnitude limit for the
FIND operation.
Command
:Gl#
:Gs#
Returns
NNN'#
Gets the larger (Gl) or smaller (Gs) size limit for the FIND
operation.
Command
:Sl NNN#
:Ss NNN#
Returns
Ok
Sets the larger (Sl) or smaller (Ss) size limit for the FIND
operation.
Command :GF#
Returns
NNN'#
Gets the field radius of the FIELD operation.
Command
:SF NNN#
Returns
Ok
Sets the field radius of the FIELD operation.
Command
:LF#
Returns
Nothing
Starts a FIND operation.
Command
:LN#
Returns
Nothing
Finds the next object in a FIND sequence.
Command
:LB#
Returns
Nothing
Finds the previous object in a FIND sequence.
Command
:Lf#
Returns
(see description)
Performs a FIELD operation returning a string containing
the number of objects in the field and the object that is
closest to the center of the field.
Command
:LC NNNN#
:LM NNNN#
:LS NNNN#
Returns
Nothing
Sets the object to the NGC (LC), Messier (LM), or Star
(LS) specified by the number. Planets are “stars” 901909. The object type returned for LC and LS commands
depends on which object type has been selected with the
Lo and Ls commands (see below).
Command
:LI#
Returns
<obj> info#
Gets the current object information.
Command
:Lo N#
Returns
Ok
Sets the NGC object library type. 0 is the NGC library, 1
is the IC library, and 2 is the UGC library. This operation is
successful only if the user has a version of the software
that includes the desired library.
Command
:Ls N#
Returns
Ok
Sets the STAR object library type. 0 is the STAR library,
1 is the SAO library, and 2 is the GCVS library. This
operation is successful only if the user has a version of
the software that includes the desired library.
f.
Miscellaneous
Command
:B+#
:B-#
:B0#
:B1#
:B2#
:B3#
Returns
Nothing
Increases (B+) or decreases (B-) reticle brightness, or
sets to one of the flashing modes (B0, B1, B2, or B3).
Command
:F+#
:F-#
:FQ#
:FF#
:FS#
Returns
Nothing
Starts focus out (F+), starts focus in (F-), stops focus
change (FQ), sets focus fast (FF), or sets focus slow (FS).
Command
:GM#
:GN#
:GO#
:GP#
Returns
XYZ#
Gets SITE name (XYZ). M through N correspond to 1
through 4.
Command
:SM XYZ#
:SN XYZ#
:SO XYZ#
:SP XYZ#
Returns
Ok
Sets SITE name.
Command
:GT#
Returns
TT.T#
Gets the current track “frequency.”
Command
:ST TT.T#
Returns
Ok
Sets the current track “frequency.”
Command
:TM#
:TQ#
:T+#
:T-#
Returns
Nothing
Switch to manual (TM) or quartz (TM). Increment (T+) or
decrement (T-) manual frequency by one tenth.
Command
:D#
Returns
(see description)
Gets the distance “bars'”string.
Command
:AL#
:AP#
:AA#
Returns
Nothing
Sets the telescopes alignment type to LAND, POLAR, or
ALTAZ.
Command
:r+#
:r-#
Returns
Nothing
Turns the field de-rotator on (:r+#) and off (:r-#).
Command
:f+#
:f-#
Returns
Nothing
Turns the fan on (:f+#) and off (:f-#).
- 58 -
4. LX200 Demo Program
The RS-232 interface communicates with your computer at
9600 Baud Rate, Parity = None, 8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bits. For
those who are familiar with programming, the LX200 Command
Set is written in ASKII character format and can be used to
write your own programs.
The LX200 Demo Program on the following pages, is written in
Quick Basic and is intended to demonstrate how commands
are sent to the telescope and information is received from the
telescope. It is not a “polished” program and does not
incorporate all of the RS-232 features available.
The program is set-up to operate on serial port 2 (COM2:). To
operate on serial port 1 (COM1:) line 4 should be changed from
“COM2:” to “COM1:.” The program is as follows:
CLS
Please note that Meade Instruments does not support these
programs, or programs that you may write in any way. For
questions relating to after-market software programs, refer
back to those manufacturers.
Meade does recommend and support our Epoch 2000sk
software package which is fully compatible with the LX200
telescope (Fig. 30). This program presents on the display of a
personal computer an incredibly detailed simulation of the
entire sky, including up to 281,000 celestial objects
Epoch 2000 allows the presentation of the most complex
starfields just as they actually appear through the telescope.
This software is available for Windows 3.1 or higher, including
Windows 95.
Fig. 30: Epoch 2000sk software.
DEFINT A-X
counter = 0
OPEN "COM2:9600,N,8,1,CD0,CS0,DS0,OP0,RS,TB2048,RB2048" FOR RANDOM AS #1
KEY ON
KEY(1) ON
KEY 1, "GO TO":
ON KEY(1) GOSUB key1
KEY(2) ON
KEY 2, "SYNC"
ON KEY(2) GOSUB KEY2
KEY(3) ON
KEY 3, "SLEW"
ON KEY(3) GOSUB key3
KEY(4) ON
KEY 4, "FIND"
ON KEY(4) GOSUB KEY4
KEY(5) ON
KEY 5, "CNTR"
ON KEY(5) GOSUB KEY5
KEY(6) ON
KEY 6, "GUIDE"
ON KEY(6) GOSUB KEY6
KEY(11) ON
ON KEY(11) GOSUB key11
KEY(12) ON
ON KEY(12) GOSUB key12
KEY(13) ON
ON KEY(13) GOSUB key13
KEY(14) ON
ON KEY(14) GOSUB key14
GOSUB status
GOSUB key3
GOSUB help
20 GOSUB telpos
GOSUB OBDRAW
GOSUB TIME
50 key$ = INKEY$: IF key$ = "" THEN GO TO 20
- 59 REM KEYS
IF key$
IF key$
IF key$
IF key$
IF key$
IF key$
IF key$
IF key$
IF key$
IF key$
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
CHR$(119) THEN GOSUB senddir: REM
CHR$(101) THEN GOSUB senddir: REM
CHR$(110) THEN GOSUB senddir: REM
CHR$(115) THEN GOSUB senddir: REM
"m" THEN GOSUB objects
"t" THEN GOSUB objects
"c" THEN GOSUB objects
"p" THEN GOSUB objects
"x" THEN CLS : END
"r" THEN RUN
a$ = "#:Mw#"
a$ = "#:Me#"
a$ = "#:Mn#"
a$ = "#:Ms#"
GO TO 20
END
senddir:
west:
IF key$ = "w" THEN a$ = "#:Mw#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO TO west
east:
IF key$ = "e" THEN a$ = "#:Me#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO TO east
north:
IF key$ = "n" THEN a$ = "#:Mn#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO TO north
south:
IF key$ = "s" THEN a$ = "#:Ms#": PRINT #1, a$: REM GO TO south
GOSUB telpos
key$ = INKEY$:
IF key$ = CHR$(32) THEN GO TO end1 ELSE GO TO senddir
end1:
B$
B$
B$
B$
=
=
=
=
"#:Qe#": PRINT #1, B$
"#:Qw#": PRINT #1, B$
"#:Qn#": PRINT #1, B$
"#:Qs#": PRINT #1, B$
RETURN
telpos:
LOCATE 6, 7: PRINT "TELESCOPE POSITION";
c$ = "#:GR#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(8, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):
RAM$ = MID$(d$, 4, 4): LOCATE 7, 10: PRINT USING "RA : \\:\ \"; RAL$; RAM$;
c$ = "#:GD#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(7, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):
RAM$ = MID$(d$, 5, 2): LOCATE 8, 10: PRINT "DEC: "; RAL$; CHR$(248); RAM$; "'";
c$ = "#:GA#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(7, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):
RAM$ = MID$(d$, 5, 2): LOCATE 9, 10: PRINT "ALT: "; RAL$; CHR$(248); RAM$; "'";
c$ = "#:GZ#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(7, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):
RAM$ = MID$(d$, 5, 2): LOCATE 10, 10: PRINT "AZ : "; RAL$; CHR$(248); RAM$; "'";
RETURN
TIME:
LOCATE 1, 32: PRINT "DATE"; : LOCATE 1, 64: PRINT "TIME";
c$ = "#:GS#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(9, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 2):
RAM$ = MID$(d$, 4, 2): RAR$ = MID$(d$, 7, 2): LOCATE 2, 55:
PRINT USING "Sidereal Time: \\:\\:\\"; RAL$; RAM$; RAR$;
c$ = "#:GL#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(9, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 2):
RAM$ = MID$(d$, 4, 2): RAR$ = MID$(d$, 7, 2): LOCATE 3, 55:
PRINT USING "Local (24hr) : \\:\\:\\"; RAL$; RAM$; RAR$;
c$ = "#:GG#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(4, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):
LOCATE 3, 25: PRINT USING "GMT Offset: \ \ Hours"; RAL$;
c$ = "#:GC#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(9, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 2):
RAM$ = MID$(d$, 4, 2): RAR$ = MID$(d$, 7, 2): LOCATE 2, 25:
PRINT USING "Date
: \\/\\/\\"; RAL$; RAM$; RAR$;
RETURN
objects:
counter = 1
LOCATE 21, 25
IF key$ = "m" THEN INPUT "Enter Messier number: "; m$: o$ = "#:LM" + m$
IF key$ = "t" THEN INPUT "Enter Star number: "; m$: o$ = "#:LS" + m$
IF key$ = "c" THEN INPUT "Enter CNGC number: "; m$: o$ = "#:LC" + m$
IF key$ = "p" THEN INPUT "Enter Planet number: "; m$: o$ = "#:LS" + m$
o$ = o$ + "#"
PRINT #1, o$
LOCATE 21, 15:
PRINT "
";
PRINT #1, "#:LI#": info$ = INPUT$(33, 1): REM LOCATE 10, 20: PRINT info$;
- 60 OBDRAW:
LOCATE 6, 31: PRINT " O B J E C T I N F O R M A T I O N";
LOCATE 7, 31: PRINT "Object: "; LEFT$(info$, 9);
LOCATE 8, 31: PRINT "Rating: "; MID$(info$, 10, 7);
LOCATE 9, 31: PRINT "Magnitude: "; MID$(info$, 20, 5);
LOCATE 10, 31: PRINT "Size:
"; MID$(info$, 27, 6);
IF counter = 0 THEN LOCATE 11, 31: PRINT "RA:"; : LOCATE 12, 31:
PRINT "DEC:"; : LOCATE 7, 60: PRINT "Distance to SLEW"; :
LOCATE 9, 55: PRINT "RA"; : LOCATE 10, 55: PRINT "Dec"; : GO TO scale
c$ = "#:Gr#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(8, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 2):
RAM$ = MID$(d$, 4, 4): LOCATE 11, 31:
PRINT USING "RA :
\\:\ \"; RAL$; RAM$;
c$ = "#:Gd#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(7, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):
RAM$ = MID$(d$, 5, 2): LOCATE 12, 31:
PRINT "DEC:
"; RAL$; CHR$(248); RAM$; "'";
distbar:
rad$ = "": decd$ = ""
c$ = "#:D#": PRINT #1, c$: d$ = INPUT$(33, 1)
FOR i = 1 TO 16
IF ASC(MID$(d$, i, 1)) = 255 THEN rad$ = rad$ + CHR$(254)
NEXT i
FOR i = 17 TO 33
IF ASC(MID$(d$, i, 1)) = 255 THEN decd$ = decd$ + CHR$(254)
NEXT i
LOCATE 7, 59: PRINT " Distance to SLEW ";
scale:
LOCATE 8, 59: PRINT "0"; CHR$(248); " 45"; CHR$(248); " 90"; CHR$(248); " 150+";
IF counter = 0 THEN RETURN
LOCATE 9, 55: PRINT "
"; : LOCATE 9, 55:
PRINT "RA "; rad$;
LOCATE 10, 55: PRINT "
"; : LOCATE 10, 55:
PRINT "DEC "; decd$;
RETURN
CHR$(248);
status:
LOCATE 1, 7: PRINT "SITE"
c$ = "#:Gt#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(7, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):
RAM$ = MID$(d$, 5, 2): LOCATE 2, 3: PRINT "Lat. : "; RAL$; CHR$ (248); RAM$; "'";
c$ = "#:Gg#": PRINT #1, c$; : d$ = INPUT$(7, 1): RAL$ = LEFT$(d$, 3):
RAM$ = MID$(d$, 5, 2): LOCATE 3, 3: PRINT "Long.: "; RAL$; CHR$ (248); RAM$; "'";
BOXSTX = 2: BOXSTY = 3: BOXWIDE = 10: boxtall = 5: GOSUB drawbox
RETURN
key1:
PRINT #1, "#:MS#"
error1$ = INPUT$(1, 1)
IF error1$ = "1" OR error1$ = "2" THEN error2$ = INPUT$(33, 1) ELSE RETURN
LOCATE 22, 20: PRINT error2$
GOSUB clearscr
RETURN
KEY2:
PRINT #1, "#:CM#"
sync$ = INPUT$(33, 1)
LOCATE 22, 20: PRINT sync$;
clearscr:
FOR i = 1 TO 30000: NEXT i: FOR i = 1 TO 30000: NEXT i: FOR i = 1 TO 30000: NEXT i:
FOR i = 1 TO 30000: NEXT i: FOR i = 1 TO 30000: NEXT i: FOR i = 1 TO 30000: NEXT i:
LOCATE 22, 20: PRINT "
";
RETURN
key3:
PRINT #1, "#:RS#"
LOCATE 24, 1: PRINT "
";
LOCATE 24, 18: PRINT CHR$(219); CHR$(178); CHR$(176); CHR$(176); CHR$(178); CHR$(219);
RETURN
KEY4:
PRINT #1, "#:RM#:"
LOCATE 24, 1: PRINT "
";
LOCATE 24, 26: PRINT CHR$(219); CHR$(178); CHR$(176); CHR$(176); CHR$(178); CHR$(219);
RETURN
- 61 KEY5:
PRINT #1, "#:RC#"
LOCATE 24, 1: PRINT "
";
LOCATE 24, 34: PRINT CHR$(219); CHR$(178); CHR$(176); CHR$(176); CHR$(178); CHR$(219);
RETURN
KEY6:
PRINT #1, "#:RG#"
LOCATE 24, 1: PRINT "
";
LOCATE 24, 42: PRINT CHR$(219); CHR$(178); CHR$(176); CHR$(176); CHR$(178); CHR$(219);
RETURN
key11:
key$ = "n"
GOSUB north
RETURN
key12:
key$ = "w"
GOSUB west
RETURN
key13:
key$ = "e"
GOSUB east
RETURN
key14:
key$ = "s"
GOSUB south
RETURN
drawbox:
REM
REM
REM
REM
RETURN
LOCATE BOXSTX, BOXSTY:
BOX$ = CHR$(201)
FOR I = 1 TO BOXWIDE: BOX$ = BOX$ + CHR$(205): NEXT
PRINT BOX$;
help:
LOCATE
LOCATE
LOCATE
LOCATE
LOCATE
LOCATE
RETURN
END
14,
15,
16,
17,
18,
19,
10:
10:
10:
10:
10:
10:
PRINT "E W N S keys move telescope. SPACE BAR stops.";
PRINT "M key to enter Messier object.";
PRINT "T key to enter sTar.";
PRINT "P key to enter Planet (900 + orbit #).";
PRINT "C key to enter Cngc object.";
PRINT "X to End program.";
- 62 -
APPENDIX G:
LX200 SPECIFICATIONS
Telescope
7" LX200 f/15
8" LX200 f/6.3
10" LX200 f/6.3
Optical Design
Maksutov-Cassegrain
Catadioptric
178mm (7")
194mm (7.625")
2670mm (105")
f/15
.64 arc sec.
standard
13.5
16.0
.55°/inch
450X
50'
9.1" Dia. x 19" Long
2.5" (12.8%)
Heavy-Duty Fork-Type
Double Tine
Dec.: 6"; R.A.: 8.75"
9-speed, microprocessor
controlled 12v. DC servo
motor; 5.75" worm gear
with Smart Drive
North and South switchable
9-speed, DC servo
controlled 5.75" worm gear
with Dec drift software
5-3/4" Worm Gear
Dec. and R.A.
Motorola 68HC05
microcontroller; 2 line x 16
alphanumeric character
display; 19 button keypad,
red LED backlit
16 MHz 68000
microprocessor; 1 Meg
program memory
16K RAM; 512 byte
non-volatile memory
(EEROM)
9.25" x 16" x 32.5"
0.74° x 0.52°
Schmidt-Cassegrain
Catadioptric
203mm (8")
209.6mm (8.25)
1280mm (50.4")
f/6.3
.56 arc sec
Standard
14.0
16.5
1.14°/inch
500X
25'
9.1" Dia. x 16" Long
3.45" (18.6%)
Heavy-Duty Fork-Type
Double Tine
Dec.: 6"; R.A.: 8.75"
9-speed, microprocessor
controlled 12v. DC servo
motor; 5.75" worm gear
with Smart Drive
North and South switchable
9-speed, DC servo
controlled 5.75" worm gear
with Dec drift software
5-3/4" Worm Gear
Dec. and R.A.
Motorola 68HC05
microcontroller; 2 line x 16
alphanumeric character
display; 19 button keypad,
red LED backlit
16 MHz 68000
microprocessor; 1 Meg
program memory
16K RAM; 512 byte
non-volatile memory
(EEROM)
9.25" x 16" x 25"
1.55° x 1.08°
Schmidt-Cassegrain
Catadioptric
254mm (10")
263.5mm (10.375)
1600mm (63")
f/6.3
.45 arc sec
Standard
14.5
17.0
0.91°/inch
625X
50'
11.75" Dia. x 22" Long
4.0" (16.0%)
Heavy-Duty Fork-Type
Double Tine
Dec.: 6"; R.A.: 8.75"
9-speed, microprocessor
controlled 12v. DC servo
motor; 5.75" worm gear
with Smart Drive
North and South switchable
9-speed, DC servo
controlled 5.75" worm gear
with Dec drift software
5-3/4" Worm Gear
Dec. and R.A.
Motorola 68HC05
microcontroller; 2 line x 16
alphanumeric character
display; 19 button keypad,
red LED backlit
16 MHz 68000
microprocessor; 1 Meg
program memory
16K RAM; 512 byte
non-volatile memory
(EEROM)
12" x 19" x 31"
1.24° x 0.86°
4.7" x 6.6"
4.6' x 6.5'
27.4' x 38.9'
9.7" x 13.6"
9.4' x 13.3'
56.3' x 79.7'
7.75" x 10.9"
7.5' x 10.7'
45.0' x 63.8'
4.4" x 6.5"
4.2' x 5.5'
24' x 34'
9.1" x 13.3"
7.7' x 14.1'
48' x 70'
7.3" x 10.6"
6.1' x 9.0'
39' x 56'
45#
7#
N/A
20#
8#
37#
7#
N/A
20#
8#
61#
N/A
26#
20#
8#
65#
9#
N/A
26#
64# (w/ case)
9#
N/A
26#
N/A
5#
69#
N/A
38#
26#
N/A
5#
Clear Aperture
Primary Mirror Diameter
Focal Length
Focal Ratio
Resolution
Super Multi-Coatings
Limiting Visual Magnitude (approx)
Limiting Photographic Magnitude (approx)
Image Scale (°/inch)
Maximum Practical Visual Power
Near Focus
Optical Tube Size
Secondary Mirror Obstruction
Telescope Mounting
Setting Circle Diameters
RA Motor Drive System
Hemispheres of Operation
Declination Control System
Motor Drive Gear Diameter
Manual Slow-Motion Controls
Hand Controller
Main Controller
Telescope Size, Swung Down
35mm Angular Film Coverage
35mm Linear Film Coverage @:
50"
500"
3000"
Tele-Extender Used Without Eyepiece @:
50'
500'
3000'
Net Telescope Weights (approx)
Telescope
Optional Equatorial Wedge
Optional Super Wedge
Field Tripod
Accessories
Shipping Weights (approx)
Telescope
Equatorial Wedge (optional)
Super Wedge (optional)
Field Tripod
Case (for 10" models)
Accessories
5#
- 63 -
Telescope
8" LX200 f/10
10" LX200 f/10
12" LX200 f/10
Optical Design
Schmidt-Cassegrain
Catadioptric
203mm (8")
209.6mm (8.25)
2000mm (80")
f/10
.56 arc sec
Standard
14.0
16.5
0.72°/inch
500X
25'
9.1" Dia. x 16" Long
3.0" (14.1%)
Heavy-Duty Fork-Type
Double Tine
Dec.: 6"; R.A.: 8.75"
9-speed, microprocessor
controlled 12v. DC servo
motor; 5.75" worm gear
with Smart Drive
North and South switchable
9-speed, DC servo
controlled 5.75" worm gear
with Dec drift software
5-3/4" Worm Gear
Dec. and R.A.
Motorola 68HC05
microcontroller; 2 line x 16
alphanumeric character
display; 19 button keypad,
red LED backlit
16 MHz 68000
microprocessor; 1 Meg
program memory
16K RAM; 512 byte
non-volatile memory
(EEROM)
9.25" x 16" x 25"
0.97° x 0.68°
Schmidt-Cassegrain
Catadioptric
254mm (10")
263.5mm (10.375)
2500mm (100")
f/10
.45 arc sec
Standard
14.5
17.0
0.57°/inch
625X
50'
11.75" Dia. x 22" Long
3.7" (13.7%)
Heavy-Duty Fork-Type
Double Tine
Dec.: 6"; R.A.: 8.75"
9-speed, microprocessor
controlled 12v. DC servo
motor; 5.75" worm gear
with Smart Drive
North and South switchable
9-speed, DC servo
controlled 5.75" worm gear
with Dec drift software
5-3/4" Worm Gear
Dec. and R.A.
Motorola 68HC05
microcontroller; 2 line x 16
alphanumeric character
display; 19 button keypad,
red LED backlit
16 MHz 68000
microprocessor; 1 Meg
program memory
16K RAM; 512 byte
non-volatile memory
(EEROM)
12" x 19" x 31"
0.78° x 0.54°
Schmidt-Cassegrain
Catadioptric
305mm (12")
314.3mm (12.375")
3048mm (120")
f/10
.375 arc sec
Standard
15.0
17.5
0.48°/inch
750X
75'
13.6" Dia. x 25" Long
4.0" (11.1%)
Heavy-Duty Fork-Type
Double Tine
Dec.: 6"; R.A.: 8.75"
9-Speed, microprocessor
controlled 12v. DC servo
motor; 5.75" worm gear
with Smart Drive
North and South switchable
9-speed, DC servo
controlled 5.75" worm gear
with Dec drift software
5-3/4" Worm Gear
Dec. and R.A.
Motorola 68HC05
microcontroller; 2 line x 16
alphanumeric character
display; 19 button keypad,
red LED backlit
16 MHz 68000
microprocessor; 1 Meg
program memory
16K RAM; 512 byte
non-volatile memory
(EEROM)
15" x 20" x 37"
0.65° x 0.45°
6.2" x 8.7"
6.0' x 8.5'
36.0' x 51.0'
5.0" x 7.0"
4.8' x 6.8'
28.8' x 40.8'
4.1" x 5.8"
4.0' x 5.7'
24.0' x 34.0'
6.8" x 8.5"
4.9' x 7.2'
31' x 45'
4.6" x 6.8"
4.0' x 5.8'
25' x 36'
3.5" x 5.7"
3.3' x 4.8'
21' x 30'
37#
7#
N/A
20#
8#
61#
N/A
26#
20#
8#
70#
N/A
26#
50#
8#
64# (w/ case)
9#
N/A
26#
30#
5#
69#
N/A
38#
26#
30#
5#
95# (w/ case)
N/A
38#
57#
N/A
10#
Clear Aperture
Primary Mirror Diameter
Focal Length
Focal Ratio
Resolution
Super Multi-Coatings
Limiting Visual Magnitude (approx)
Limiting Photographic Magnitude (approx)
Image Scale (°/inch)
Maximum Practical Visual Power
Near Focus
Optical Tube Size
Secondary Mirror Obstruction
Telescope Mounting
Setting Circle Diameters
RA Motor Drive System
Hemispheres of Operation
Declination Control System
Motor Drive Gear Diameter
Manual Slow-Motion Controls
Hand Controller
Main Controller
Telescope Size, Swung Down
35mm Angular Film Coverage
35mm Linear Film Coverage @:
50"
500"
3000"
Tele-Extender Used Without Eyepiece @:
50'
500'
3000'
Net Telescope Weights (approx)
Telescope
Optional Equatorial Wedge
Optional Super Wedge
Field Tripod
Accessories
Shipping Weights (approx)
Telescope
Equatorial Wedge (optional)
Super Wedge (optional)
Field Tripod
Case (for 10" models)
Accessories
MEADE LIMITED WARRANTY
Every Meade telescope, spotting scope, and telescope accessory is warranted by Meade Instruments Corporation (“Meade”)
to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase in the U.S.A.
and Canada. Meade will repair or replace a product, or part thereof, found by Meade to be defective, provided the defective
part is returned to Meade, freight-prepaid, with proof of purchase. This warranty applies to the original purchaser only and is
non-transferable. Meade products purchased outside North America are not included in this warranty, but are covered under
separate warranties issued by Meade international distributors.
RGA Number Required: Prior to the return of any product or part, a Return Goods Authorization (RGA) number must be
obtained from Meade by writing, or by calling (949) 451-1450. Each returned part or product must include a written statement
detailing the nature of the claimed defect, as well as the owner’s name, address, and phone number.
This warranty is not valid in cases where the product has been abused or mishandled, where unauthorized repairs have been
attempted or performed, or where depreciation of the product is due to normal wear-and-tear. Meade specifically disclaims
special, indirect, or consequential damages or lost profit which may result from a breach of this warranty. Any implied
warranties which can not be disclaimed are hereby limited to a term of one year from the date of original retail purchase.
This warranty gives you specific rights. You may have other rights which vary from state to state.
Meade reserves the right to change product specifications or to discontinue products without notice.
This warranty supersedes all previous Meade product warranties.
Meade Instruments Corporation
World’s leading manufacturer of astronomical telescopes for the serious amateur.
6001 OAK CANYON, IRVINE, CALIFORNIA 92620-4205 U.S.A.
FAX: (949) 451-1460 ■ www.meade.com
Ver 0499
■
(949) 451-1450
Part no. 14-0208-00
Download PDF